JP6530627B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling the progress of a game and sub control means controlled by various commands from the main control means. For example, when the stop operation is performed, the main control means causes the symbol combination as a result of the game to be stopped and displayed, and pays out the medals according to the symbol combination stopped and displayed. The sub control means, when receiving a command from the main control means, causes the effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) to execute various effects. Moreover, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known a technique in which the sub control means causes the effect executing means to execute an instruction effect for instructing a specific stop operation mode (stop operation order, stop operation position). For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a technique in which the sub control means causes the effect execution means to execute a push order navigation effect for instructing a stop operation order for stopping and displaying a specific winning combination on the active line.

JP, 2015-29805, A

  In the above-described gaming machine, when a problem occurs in the sub control means, it may be impossible to execute the instruction effect. In the above case, there is a disadvantage that the game proceeds in a state where the instruction of the stop operation mode is impossible. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present invention has an object of enabling an instruction of a stop operation mode even when a failure occurs in the sub control means.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention changes the start operation means operated when starting the game, and variably displays a plurality of types of symbols when the game is started, and A variable display means capable of stopping and displaying the symbol combination as a result, a stop operation means operated when stopping and displaying the symbol, a specific display means for displaying various information, and a game when a game medium is inserted Can be started, and the winning combination is determined in each game, and the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the variable display means according to the stop operation mode of the player for the stop operation means and the winning combination, and the symbol combination stopped and displayed is determined. And when it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the main control means for paying out the game media of the number of payouts corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the predetermined winning combination is determined When it is determined that the specific display means can be controlled to the first display mode that can specify the stop operation mode for stopping and displaying a predetermined symbol combination, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the predetermined symbol Main control means for controlling the specific display means to the second display mode capable of specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the combination and transmitting the operation mode command indicating the stop operation mode specified from the first display mode, and the operation When a mode command is received, an instruction effect for notifying an operation mode indicated by the operation mode command can be selected from a plurality of instruction effects including a first instruction effect and a second instruction effect different from the first instruction effect. And the main control means is operated by the last stop operation means after the stop operation of at least the symbol becomes possible in the game in which the predetermined winning combination has been determined. In the first display mode, and after the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the first display mode is different from the first display mode and the second display mode is different from the second display mode. The specific display means is controlled to the display mode of 3 for a predetermined time length, and thereafter the specific display means can be controlled to the second display mode without requiring a specific operation, and the game start operation is There are cases where a specific period of a predetermined length of time may be included in the pre-stop period from when it is stopped until the symbol stop operation becomes possible, and the specific display means is controlled in the third display mode in a predetermined time length. If the specific display means includes a specific period, the specific display means may immediately stop the symbol in the pre-stop period after the specific period is completed. Start display in 1 display mode The time length of the specific period is variable.

  According to the above configuration, instruction information for instructing the operation mode of the stop operation means is displayed by the specific display means controlled by the main control means. Therefore, even if a fault occurs in the sub control means, the stop operation mode is indicated by the specific display means controlled by the main control means.

  Further, in the configuration of the present invention, when the operation mode command is received, the instruction effect of notifying the operation mode indicated by the operation mode command is a second instruction effect in which the first instruction effect and the first instruction effect are different. And sub-control means selectable from a plurality of instruction effects including In the above configuration, since one stop operation mode is notified by a plurality of instruction effects, the instruction effect is richer in comparison with the configuration in which the instruction effect of one stop operation mode does not change.

  According to the present invention, even when a failure occurs in the sub control means, it is possible to instruct the stop operation mode.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure showing the back of a front door. It is a figure which shows each symbol arranged on each reel. It is a figure for demonstrating a symbol display area. It is a functional block diagram of a gaming machine. It is a conceptual diagram of a symbol arrangement table. It is a conceptual diagram of a symbol code table. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning area lottery table. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination prescription table. It is a figure for demonstrating the replay which stops by each stop operation order. It is a figure for demonstrating the bell which stops in each stop operation order. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning combination which stops at each stop operation position. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific operation aspect. It is a conceptual diagram of a transition symbol prescription table. It is a figure for demonstrating transition of an instruction | indication state. It is a conceptual diagram of the instruction | indication determination table in each instruction | indication state containing the state in AT. It is a conceptual diagram of the instruction | indication determination table in the completion preparation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the instruction | indication indicator in the state in AT and the state ready for start. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the instruction | indication indicator in the completion preparation state. It is a figure for demonstrating each command transmitted from a main control board. It is a conceptual diagram of a spinning drum effect determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of AT determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of the indication effect determination table in the AT state and the start preparation state. It is a figure for demonstrating each instruction | indication effect. It is a conceptual diagram of the indication effect determination table in the end preparation state. It is a figure for demonstrating each pushing order placement effect. It is a conceptual diagram of an effect lottery table. It is a figure for explaining aim production. It is a figure for demonstrating the display time of instruction information, and the execution time of instruction performance. It is a flowchart of start processing of main CPU. It is a flowchart of a setting change process of main CPU. It is a flowchart of game control processing of main CPU. 5 is a flowchart of an initial setting process of a main CPU. It is a flowchart of an automatic input process of the main CPU. 6 is a flowchart of pre-game start processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of insertion medal acceptance processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of BET operation reception processing of main CPU. It is a flow chart of settlement operation reception processing of main CPU. It is a flowchart of lottery execution processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of an internal lottery process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a spinning drum effect determination process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the instruction | indication number determination process of main CPU. 10 is a flowchart of wait processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of pre-stop processing of the main CPU. It is a conceptual diagram of a priority storage area. It is a flowchart of priority storage processing of main CPU. It is a flowchart of stop control processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the display determination processing of main CPU. It is a flowchart of the hopper drive processing of main CPU. It is a flow chart of game state transition processing of the main CPU. It is a flow chart of each processing of game state transition processing of main CPU. It is a flowchart of the interruption process of main CPU. It is a flowchart of the sub activation process of sub CPU. It is a flowchart of each task of sub CPU. It is a flowchart of command analysis processing of sub CPU. It is a flowchart of production control processing of sub CPU. It is a flowchart of processing at the time of start operation of sub CPU. It is a figure for demonstrating each instruction information of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the instruction | indication indicator in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the instruction | indication indicator in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the display time of instruction information in 5th Embodiment, and the execution time of instruction performance. It is a figure for demonstrating the indication indicator of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of 7th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram of the instruction | indication determination table of 7th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram of each command of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the bonus notification state of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the indicator of a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the indicator of a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating each structure of a modification.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail by embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Structure of gaming machine>
The structure of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1. A player plays a game on the gaming machine 1 using a game medium (for example, a medal or a game ball). In the present embodiment, a gaming machine 1 (pachislot machine) in which medals are used as gaming media is exemplified.

  The gaming machine 1 includes a box-like cabinet 2 having an opening on the front side (player side) and a front door 3. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the internal structure of the cabinet 2. Moreover, FIG. 3 is an example of the front view of the back surface (surface of the inner side of the game machine 1) of the front door 3. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the cabinet 2 is provided with a hinge mechanism 2 a. The front door 3 is pivotally supported by a hinge mechanism 2a so that the opening of the cabinet 2 can be opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of (14 in the example of FIG. 1) housing lamps 5 are provided on the peripheral side of the front door 3. Each of the housing lamps 5 includes, for example, a light emitter such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode) and a light transmissive lens covering the light emitter. The housing lamp 5 emits light in a mode corresponding to each effect in the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a waist panel 6. The lumbar panel 6 is drawn with the name of the gaming machine 1 and the like. Moreover, the light-emitting body which irradiates the waist panel 6 is provided in the inside of the game machine 1 (front door 3). As a light emitter for irradiating the waist panel 6, for example, a light emitting diode or a cold cathode tube is employed. Further, below the lumbar panel 6, a tray unit 7 for storing medals is provided. The tray unit 7 is provided so that the player can freely take out the stored medals.

  The front door 3 is provided with a medal insertion portion 8 having an opening into which a medal is inserted, and a medal payout opening 9 from which medals from the inside of the gaming machine 1 are discharged. When a predetermined number (three) of medals are inserted from the medal insertion portion 8, the game can be started. The prescribed number is set according to the state of the game. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 9 are stored in the tray unit 7.

  A panel 10 is provided at the center of the front of the front door 3. At the center of the panel 10, a substantially rectangular display window 11 is formed. A plurality of reels 12 (12L, 12C, 12R) inside the cabinet 2 can be visually recognized from the display window 11.

  Each reel 12 is configured to include a substantially cylindrical drum portion and a belt-like sheet member mounted on the outer peripheral surface of the drum portion. The sheet member of the reel 12 is light transmitting, and a plurality of types of designs are drawn. The reels 12 are rotatably provided, and horizontally arranged to be adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. Specifically, the reels 12 are arranged such that the rotation axes are positioned on the same straight line. Further, each reel 12 is fixed to the reel support 12F. A stepping motor 101 (101L, 101C, 101R) is provided on each of the reels 12 (not shown), and each reel 12 is rotated by each stepping motor 101.

  FIG. 4 is a view showing each symbol arranged on each reel 12 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer periphery of each of the plurality of reels 12 is divided into 21 pieces. As shown in FIG. 4, one symbol is drawn on each frame, and on each reel 12, a plurality of kinds of symbols including a "bell" symbol and a "replay x" symbol are drawn. In this embodiment, the Nth frame (N is an integer from the numerical value "0" to the numerical value "20") may be described as the symbol position "N" from the bottom of the arrangement of the symbols shown in FIG. For example, the symbol of the symbol position "5" of the left reel 12L is a red seven symbol. The player can generally identify each symbol of the reel 12 even while the reel 12 is rotating. Therefore, the player can perform an operation (so-called eye-pushing) to stop the reel 12 at the timing when a specific symbol passes through the display window 11. In addition, in FIG. 4, each pattern is shown in a color different from the color of each actual pattern.

  In the display window 11 of the front door 3 shown in FIG. 1, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each reel 12. That is, when all the reels 12 are stopped, a total of nine symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window 11. In the present embodiment, an area in which each symbol is displayed is referred to as a "symbol display area".

  FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the symbol display area. As shown in FIG. 5, the symbol display area is configured to include each unit area U (L, C, R). One symbol is displayed in each of the unit areas U. Each unit area U is each unit area UL where each symbol of left reel 12L is displayed, each unit area UC where each symbol of middle reel 12C is displayed, and each unit where each symbol of right reel 12R is displayed And the region UR. Each unit area UL includes a unit area UL1 located in the upper stage, a unit area UL2 located in the middle stage, and a unit area UL3 located in the lower stage. Each unit area UC includes a unit area UC1 located in the upper stage, a unit area UC2 located in the middle stage, and a unit area UC3 located in the lower stage, and each unit area UR includes the unit area UR1 located in the upper stage and the middle stage And a unit region UR3 located in the lower stage.

  When a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion section 8, an effective line is set. The effective line is composed of any one unit area U of the reel 12L in each unit area U, any one unit area U of the reel 12C and any one unit area U of the reel 12R. It is an area. The effective line of this embodiment is a line connecting the unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the unit area UR2 of the reel 12R among the unit areas U stopped and displayed in the symbol display area.

  A combination of symbols as a result of the game is stopped and displayed on the activated line. When the combination of symbols determined in advance on the activated line is stopped, a benefit is given to the player according to the combination of the stopped symbols. For example, when the combination of symbols relating to winning is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the player is awarded a medal. Further, when the combination of symbols relating to replay is stop-displayed on the activated line, the player is given the right to replay. Specifically, when a combination of symbols relating to replay is displayed in this game, it is possible to start the next game without requiring the insertion of medals. The combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line is determined for each game according to the result of the internal lottery process described later.

  In this embodiment, a line connecting the unit area UL1 at the upper end of the reel 12L, the unit area UC1 at the upper end of the reel 12C, and the unit area UR1 at the upper end of the reel 12R may be referred to as an “upper line”. Similarly, there is a case where a line (effective line in the present embodiment) connecting the middle unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the middle unit area UR2 of the reel 12R is referred to as "middle line". is there. A line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the lower part of the reel 12L, the lower unit area UC3 of the lower part of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the lower part of the reel 12R may be referred to as "lower line". A line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an "upper right line". Similarly, a line connecting the upper unit region UL1 of the reel 12L, the middle unit region UC2 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit region UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a “right downward line”.

  Moreover, each backlight 12 is provided with each back light which illuminates the sheet member of the said reel 12 from inner side (not shown). Specifically, each of the reels 12 has a backlight for illuminating the unit area U of the upper line of the reel 12, a backlight for illuminating the unit area U of the middle line, and a backlight for illuminating the unit area U of the lower line. Provided.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the panel 10 has an insertable indicator lamp 13, BET lamps 14 (14 a, 14 b, 14 c), a start lamp 15, an instruction indicator 16, a storage quantity indicator 17, a replay indicator lamp 18, A plurality of displays (hereinafter referred to as "main display ML") including weight lamp 19 and stop lamp 20 are provided. Each lamp of the main display ML is controlled by a main CPU 301 described later.

  The insertable display lamp 13 informs whether or not it is possible to receive the medal from the medal insertion section 8. Specifically, in the state where it is possible to receive the medal from the medal insertion section 8, the insertable display lamp 13 is turned on. On the other hand, in the state where the medal can not be received, the insertable display lamp 13 is turned off. For example, while the reel 12 is rotating, since the medals can not be received, the insertable display lamp 13 is turned off. On the other hand, when all the reels 12 are stopped and the medals can be received, the insertable display lamp 13 is lighted.

  The BET lamp 14 displays the number of bet medals. In addition, the BET lamp 14 includes a single lamp 14a, a double lamp 14b, and a triple lamp 14c. When one bet medal is set, one lamp 14a lights up, and when two bet medals are set, one lamp 14a and two lamps 14b light up and three bet medals are set The one lamp 14a, the two lamp 14b and the three lamp 14c are turned on.

  The start lamp 15 indicates whether it is possible to receive a game start operation (an operation of a start lever 24 described later). Specifically, the start lamp 15 is turned on when a prescribed number of bet medals are set, or when a combination of symbols relating to replay is stopped on the active line.

  The instruction display 16 is controlled by the main CPU 301 and displays instruction information for instructing the operation mode (pushing order) of the stop button 25. As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information in each AT state game. In addition, when the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed on the activated line, the instruction display 16 displays the number of medals to be awarded to the player. For example, when the symbol combination "bell-bell-bell" is stopped and displayed on the activated line, nine medals are given to the player, and the instruction display 16 displays the number "9". That is, the indication display 16 is a display in which the conventional payout number display for displaying the payout number of medals is combined with the display function of the instruction information. The indicator 16 of the present embodiment is a two-digit seven-segment display.

  The number of medals awarded to the player can be electrically stored (stored) in the gaming machine 1 (main RAM 303 described later). In the present embodiment, the number of stored medals is referred to as the “number of credits”. The number of credits is added when medals are awarded as a result of the game. Further, the credit number is added when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 in a state where the bet medal of the specified number is inserted.

  The stored number display 17 displays the number of credits. Specifically, the stored sheet number display 17 variably displays the numerical value “0” to the numerical value “50” which is the upper limit value of the credit number according to the stored credit number.

  The re-play display lamp 18 informs that the re-play is in progress. Specifically, the re-game display lamp 18 is turned on until the next game is over after the combination of symbols relating to the re-game in the current game is stopped and displayed on the activated line. By turning on the replaying indicator lamp 18, the player is notified that the start operation of the next game is possible without using the medal.

  The weight lamp 19 lights up in a wait period from when the game start operation (operation of the start lever 24 described later) is performed to when the rotation of each reel 12 is started. The wait period is provided to make the average length of time required for one game equal to or more than a predetermined value (about 4.1 seconds). The stop lamp 20 notifies that the game can not be stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 has a 1 BET button 21, a MAX-BET button 22, a settlement button 23, a start lever 24, a plurality of stop buttons 25 (25 L, 25 C, 25 R) and direction designation with effect buttons 26. A plurality of operation units including a button 27 are provided. Each operation unit is operated by the player.

  The 1 BET button 21 is operated when one bet medal is set using the stored medals. For example, when the bet medal is not set and the 1 BET button 21 is operated, the number "1" is subtracted from the number of credits, and the bet medal is set to one. That is, the player can set one bet medal using the stored medal by operating the 1 BET button 21.

  The MAX-BET button 22 is operated to set a prescribed number of bet medals using the stored medals. For example, when the MAX-BET button 22 is operated in a state where a betting medal is not set, 3 (prescribed number of sheets) are subtracted from the number of credits, and 3 betting medals are set.

  The settlement button 23 is operated when the medals and bet medals stored as the number of credits are settled. When the settlement button 23 is operated, the number of medals obtained by adding the credit and the bet medals is paid out from the medal payout opening 9. The bet medal may be settled by the first operation of the settlement button 23 and the credit may be settled by the second operation.

  The start lever 24 is operated by the player when starting the game. The player can instruct the start of the game by performing the start operation on the start lever 24 while the game can be started. The start lever 24 of the present embodiment can be tilted in any direction 360 degrees from a state substantially perpendicular to the front door 3. In addition, the grip ball portion of the start lever 24 is formed of a translucent resin, and incorporates the lever effect lamp 42. The lever effect lamp 42 lights up in a predetermined effect.

  The stop button 25 is operated by the player when stopping the reel 12. The stop button 25 also includes a stop button 25L, a stop button 25C, and a stop button 25R. The stop button 25L corresponds to the reel 12L, the stop button 25C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the stop button 25R corresponds to the reel 12R. When the stop button 25 corresponding to the reel 12 is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation") while the reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the first stop operation in each game is referred to as a first stop operation. Similarly, the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, control for causing the gaming machine 1 (main CPU 301 described later) to stop the reel 12 based on the first stop operation is referred to as first stop control. Similarly, stop control of the reel 12 based on the second stop operation is referred to as second stop control, and stop control of the reel 12 based on the third stop operation is referred to as third stop control. Further, the symbol position of the reel 12 positioned in the middle line of the display window 11 at the time of the stop operation is referred to as the stop operation position.

  When all the reels 12 stop, a combination of symbols as a result of the game is displayed on the activated line, and the game is ended. As described later, when the game is started, each reel 12 accelerates to a fixed rotation speed. In a period in which each reel 12 has a constant rotational speed (a period in which the reel 12 is in steady rotation), a stop operation for displaying the result of the game on the active line in a stopped state can be performed. On the other hand, in the acceleration period from the start of rotation of each reel 12 to the steady rotation, even if the reel 12 is rotating, the stop operation for displaying the result of the game is not accepted.

  The effect button 26 is operated by the player when giving an instruction regarding an effect. For example, the user can instruct execution of a specific effect by operating the effect button 26. That is, the specific effect is performed in response to the operation of the effect button 26 (trigger). It is also possible to combine the function of the effect button 26 with the MAX-BET button 22. According to the above configuration, the effect button 26 is omitted, and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The direction specifying button 27 is operated by the player, for example, when a menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The direction specification button 27 is configured to include an up button, a down button, a right button, and a left button. For example, by operating the direction specifying button 27, it is possible to move a cursor for specifying an option displayed on the menu image. Specifically, when the upper button is operated, the cursor in the menu image moves upward. Similarly, when the lower button is operated, the cursor moves downward, when the right button is operated, the cursor moves right, and when the left button is operated, the cursor moves left.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the main display ML (start lamp 15 etc.) described above, the panel 10 of the front door 3 has a plurality of effect lamps 28 (28a to 28e) and a plurality of stop operation order display lamps 29 (29L, 29C, 29R) are provided. While each lamp of the main display ML is controlled by the main CPU 301, each effect lamp 28 and each stop operation order display lamp 29 are controlled by a sub CPU 412 described later. Among the plurality of effect lamps 28, the effect lamp 28a and the effect lamp 28b are provided on the left side of the display window 11 in front view, and the effect lamp 28c to the effect lamp 28e are on the right side of the display window 11 in front view Provided in Each effect lamp 28 reports the current game state and the like.

  The respective stop operation order display lamps 29 are provided in an area below the display window 11 in the panel 10, and notify the order of the operation of the respective stop buttons 25. Specifically, the stop operation order display lamp 29L is provided at a position corresponding to the reel 12L (lower left side of the display window 11), and the stop operation order display lamp 29C is corresponding to the position corresponding to the reel 12C The stop operation order display lamp 29R is provided at the center lower side, and is provided at a position corresponding to the reel 12R (lower right side of the display window 11). For example, it is assumed that the player is notified of the sequence (so-called reverse pressing) of the stop button 25R in the first stop operation, the stop button 25C in the second stop operation, and the stop button 25L in the third stop operation. In the above case, the stop operation order display lamp 29R lights up when the game is started, and the stop operation order display lamp 29C lights up after the stop button 25R is operated, and the stop operation order after the stop button 25C is operated The indicator lamp 29L lights up.

  As shown in FIG. 1, above the display window 11 of the front door 3, a liquid crystal display device 30 for displaying various images is provided. The liquid crystal display device 30 displays a moving image and a still image according to the effect performed by the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 30 reports information relating to the result of the internal lottery process described later, information suggesting the gaming state, and the like. Also, the liquid crystal display device 30 is larger than the indication display 16 as understood from FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front door 3 is provided with speakers 31 (31 L, 31 R) and speakers 32 (32 L, 32 R). The speaker 31 is provided on the lower end side of the front door 3 and includes a speaker 31L attached to the left side and a speaker 31R attached to the right side when viewed from the player side. Further, the speaker 32 is provided on the upper end side of the front door 3 and includes a speaker 32L attached to the left side and a speaker 32R attached to the right side as viewed from the player side. The speakers 31 and 32 output sounds (music, sounds and sound effects) according to the presentation. For example, the speaker 31 and the speaker 32 output the sound related to the effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 30, the effect lamp 28, the housing lamp 5, the stop operation order display lamp 29, or the lever effect lamp 42 described above. Do. The speaker 31 and the speaker 32 are attached to the back surface of the front door 3, and a plurality of sound emission holes are formed on the surface of the front door 3 at positions corresponding to the speaker 31 and the speaker 32.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a return button 33. The return button 33 is operated to eliminate the medal clogging in the medal passage inside the gaming machine 1. By operating the return button 33, the medals stuck in the medal channel are discharged from the medal payout opening 9.

  The front door 3 is provided with a locking device 4 in which a keyhole is formed. The front door 3 is locked by the locking device 4 of the front door 3 engaging with a locking piece (not shown) of the cabinet 2. As shown in FIG. 1, the keyhole of the locking device 4 is located on the front of the front door 3, and a key (not shown) for unlocking the front door 3 can be inserted. As described later, various operation units (for example, setting change buttons 37) are provided inside the cabinet 2. Each operation unit inside the cabinet 2 is operated by a key manager who unlocks the front door 3 (for example, a store clerk at a game arcade where the game machine 1 is installed).

  As shown in FIG. 3, a selector 34 capable of switching the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 is provided on the back surface of the front door 3. Specifically, the selector 34 includes a solenoid (not shown), and the passage of the medal is switched according to the ON / OFF state of the solenoid. In addition, the ON / OFF state of the solenoid is changed depending on whether or not the insertion of the medal is permitted. For example, when the insertion of the medal is permitted, the solenoid of the selector 34 is in the ON state, and the selector 34 guides the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 to the inside of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, an inserted medal guide member 522 is provided in the vicinity of the right side of the selector 34 when viewed from the inside of the gaming machine 1. The inserted medal guide member 522 guides the medal having passed the selector 34 to the hopper 520 provided inside the cabinet 2.

  On the other hand, when the insertion of the medal is not permitted (for example, when the reel 12 is rotating), the solenoid of the selector 34 is in the OFF state, and the selector 34 selects the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 Lead to the outside of 1. Further, the selector 34 guides the foreign substance (for example, illegal medal) inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 to the outside of the gaming machine 1 even when insertion of the medal is permitted. As shown in FIG. 3, a discharged medal guide member 523 is provided near the lower side of the selector 34. The ejection medal guide member 523 guides the medals and the like from the selector 34 to the medal payout opening 9 on the front side of the front door 3.

  As shown in FIG. 2, inside the cabinet 2, a hopper 520 having a tank portion 521 a for storing medals and having a discharge slit 521 b for discharging medals is provided. The medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 are stored in the tank portion 521a, and the medals stored in the tank portion 521a are paid out from the discharge slit 521b to the tray unit 7 through the medal payout opening 9. For example, the hopper 520 pays out the medals when the combination of symbols relating to winning is displayed on the activated line or when the settlement button 23 is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a payout medal guide member 524 is provided on the back of the front door 3. The payout medal guide member 524 guides the medal from the hopper 520 to the medal payout opening 9. Specifically, the payout medal guide member 524 has an opening, which faces the discharge slit 521 b of the hopper 520 in a state where the front door 3 is closed. The medals discharged from the discharge slit 521 b enter the opening of the payout medal guide member 524, and are guided to the medal payout port 9 by the payout medal guide member 524.

  As shown in FIG. 2, an auxiliary storage section 530 is provided inside the cabinet 2. The auxiliary storage unit 530 stores the medals overflowing from the hopper 520. A hole may be provided to penetrate the bottom of the auxiliary storage unit 530 and the bottom of the cabinet 2, and the medals overflowing from the hopper may be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1 through the hole.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2. Specifically, the main control board 300 is housed in a transparent board case and attached to the back plate of the cabinet 2. On the main control board 300, various electronic components including a main CPU 301 described later are mounted. The main control board 300 is electrically connected to various boards including a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a sub control board 400, and a power supply board 500, which will be described later, through connectors (not shown). In addition, the various substrates mentioned above may be comprised with a single board | substrate, and may be comprised with a several board | substrate.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a setting display unit 36 and a setting change button 37 are provided inside the cabinet 2. The setting display unit 36 displays the setting value of the gaming machine 1. The set value is a numerical value related to the payout rate of the gaming machine 1, and various types of lottery are executed at a probability according to the set value in each game. For example, set values “1” to “6” are provided, and the set value “6” has the highest payout rate. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the key hole (not shown) for setting change and rotated, the setting display unit 36 displays the setting value.

  The setting change button 37 is operated when changing the numerical value of the setting display unit 36. The setting display unit 36 adds and displays a numerical value by one each time the setting change button 37 is operated. For example, when the setting change button 37 is operated while the numerical value "1" is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the setting display unit 36. However, when the setting change button 37 is operated in a state where the numerical value "6" is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the numerical value "1" is displayed on the setting display unit 36. When the start lever 24 is operated in a period in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36 at the time of the operation is stored as the setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a sub control board 400 is provided on the back of the front door 3. The sub control substrate 400 is configured to include various substrates including the effect control substrate 410, the image control substrate 420, and the sound substrate 430.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 510 is provided inside the cabinet 2. The power supply device 510 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter (both not shown), generates a DC voltage from an AC voltage supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and generates plural types of DC voltages from the generated DC voltage. Generate a DC voltage. For example, the power supply device 510 includes a DC voltage of 32 V used to drive a motor and a solenoid, a DC voltage of 12 V supplied to the liquid crystal display 30, and a 5 V supplied to an electronic circuit board (for example, the main control board 300). And generate a DC voltage of

  As shown in FIG. 2, the power supply device 510 is provided with a power button 511 and a reset button 512. When the power button 511 is operated to the ON state, power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power button 511 is operated to the OFF state, the power is shut off. The reset button 512 is operated when resetting the gaming state or the like. Specifically, when the reset button is operated, a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303 described later is reset to an initial value.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the power supply device 510 is provided with a shielding plate 513. The shielding plate 513 is located on the front side of the power button 511 and the reset button 512. In addition, the shielding plate 513 can be moved to a position where the power button 511 and the reset button 512 are shielded and a position not shielded. Specifically, in a state where the front door 3 is closed, the shielding plate 513 shields the power button 511 and the reset button 512. According to the above configuration, for example, a wire is inserted into the sound emission hole of the speaker 31 from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and an illegal operation of operating the power button 511 or the reset button 512 inside the gaming machine 1 is suppressed.

<Circuit of gaming machine>
The structure of the gaming machine 1 has been described above. The function of each circuit provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the gaming machine 1 includes a reel substrate 100, a relay substrate 200, a main control substrate 300, a sub control substrate 400, and a power supply substrate 500.

<Main control board>
As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I / F (interface) circuit 305. The main CPU 301, the main ROM 302, and the main RAM 303 may be provided as separate electronic devices, or may be provided as a one-chip microcomputer in which each element is integrally configured.

  The main ROM 302 non-volatilely stores the control program executed by the main CPU 301 and various data (for example, a winning area lottery table). The main RAM 303 stores various data used in each process executed by the main CPU 301.

  The main CPU 301 reads the control program stored in the main ROM 302, and performs predetermined processing according to the progress of the game, thereby performing various processing including the sub control board 400, each reel 12, the hopper 520, and the main display ML. Control the device.

  The random number generator 304 generates a random number value R1 used in an internal lottery process described later. The random number generator 304 of the present embodiment includes a counter circuit, a sampling circuit, and a pulse generation circuit (all not shown), and generates hardware random numbers. Specifically, the pulse generation circuit outputs a signal to the counter circuit at a predetermined cycle. The value of the counter circuit is incremented by "1" each time a signal is input from the pulse generation circuit. The sampling circuit stores the numerical value of the counter circuit as a random value R1 when the player performs a game start operation. The random value R1 is generated in the range of numerical values "0" to "65535". Note that software random numbers may be adopted as the random value R1.

  In the present embodiment, a random number value R2 is generated in addition to the random number value R1. The random number value R2 is a software random number acquired from a register incorporated in the main CPU 301, and is generated in the range of numerical values "0" to "255". As described later, the random number value R2 is used in the spinning drum effect determination process. Further, the main CPU 301 generates a random number value R3. The random number value R3 is a hardware random number generated in the range of the numerical value "0" to "65535", similarly to the random number value R1. The random value R3 is used in an AT determination process described later. A software random number may be adopted as the random number value R3.

  The I / F circuit 305 inputs, to the main CPU 301, signals from the switches SW (for example, the start switch 24SW) of various operation units (for example, the start lever 24) and signals from the respective sensors SE (for example, the medal sensor 34SE). Signals from each switch SW and each sensor SE are high level or low level signals. In the present embodiment, for the sake of explanation, a signal of the first level (high level or low level) is referred to as an ON signal, and a signal of the second level (low level or high level) is referred to as an OFF signal. Do. Whether the first level which is the ON signal is high level or low level is set according to the type of the switch SW or the sensor SE.

  The I / F circuit 305 outputs various signals for driving the main display ML, the hopper 520 and the respective reels 12 to the outside of the main control board 300. Also, the I / F circuit 305 outputs various commands to the sub control board 400. Note that the command from the sub control board 400 is not received by the main control board 300 in order to prevent an incorrect command from being input to the main control board.

  A signal from the main control board 300 is input to the reel board 100. The reel substrate 100 outputs a drive pulse to each reel 12 in accordance with a signal from the main control substrate 300. Each stepping motor 101 of each reel 12 is driven according to the drive pulse from the reel substrate 100.

  The stepping motor 101 comprises a plurality of (four) coils. The combination of coils excited among the respective coils is sequentially switched each time a drive pulse is input from the reel substrate 100, and the combination of coils to be excited is sequentially switched, whereby each reel 12 is rotated. Specifically, when the combination of the excited coils of the stepping motor 101 is switched once, the reel 12 is rotated by a predetermined angle. For example, when the pulse is applied 24 times, the reel 12 rotates by an angle of one frame (unit area U), and when the pulse is applied 504 times, the reel 12 rotates 1 revolution. In the above configuration, the rotation speed of the reel 12 becomes faster as the time interval at which the drive pulse is applied is shorter.

  On / off signals from a plurality of reel sensors 111 (111L, 111C, 111R) are input to the main control board 300 via the reel board 100. Among the reel sensors 111, the reel sensor 111L corresponds to the reel 12L, the reel sensor 111C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the reel sensor 111R corresponds to the reel 12R. Each reel sensor 111 outputs an ON signal when the rotation angle of the corresponding reel 12 is the reference position. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of each reel 12 is other than the reference position, each reel sensor 111 outputs an OFF signal. The main CPU 301 of the main control board 300 can determine the rotation angle of each reel 12 from the signal from each reel sensor 111 and the number of times the drive pulse is output to each stepping motor 101.

  The relay board 200 relays a signal from the main control board 300 to the main display ML. In response to the signal output from main control board 300, main display ML is driven. Further, the relay board 200 relays ON / OFF signals inputted to the main control board 300 from the sensors (start switch 24SW etc. described later) which detect the operation of the operation parts (start lever 24 etc.). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, relay board 200 relays ON / OFF signals from 1 BET switch 21SW, MAX-BET switch 22SW, settlement switch 23SW, start switch 24SW, stop switch 25SW and medal sensor 34SE. Do. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the power supply substrate 500 relays ON / OFF signals of various sensors or switches including the full tank sensor 530SE, the reset switch 512SE, and the payout sensor 112SE.

  The 1 BET switch 21SW detects an operation of the 1 BET button 21 by the player. In addition, the ON signal from the 1 BET switch 21SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the 1 BET switch 21SW is input, the main CPU 301 adds one medal to a bet medal.

  The MAX-BET switch 22SW detects the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 by the player. Further, the ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input, the main CPU 301 sets a predetermined number of medals as a bet medal.

  The settlement switch 23SW detects the operation of the settlement button 23 by the player. The ON signal from the settlement switch 23SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200.

  When the ON signal from the settlement switch 23SW is input, or when a combination of symbols relating to winning is displayed on the effective line, the main CPU 301 outputs a hopper drive signal to the hopper 520. The hopper drive signal is input from the main control board 300 to the hopper 520 via the power supply board 500. The hopper 520 pays out the medals when the hopper drive signal is input.

  The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal to the main control board 300 every time one medal is dispensed from the hopper 520. Specifically, the payout sensor 112SE is provided at a position where a medal passing through the discharge slit 521b of the hopper 520 is detected. The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal when a medal is detected. The payout signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. The main CPU 301 can determine the number of medals paid out by counting the number of times the payout signal is input.

  The full tank sensor 530SE detects that the auxiliary storage unit 530 is full. Specifically, the full tank sensor 530SE is provided at a predetermined height from the bottom of the auxiliary storage unit 530, and the ON signal is generated when the medals inside the auxiliary storage unit 530 increase and reach the position of the full tank sensor 530SE. Are output to the main control board 300. The ON signal of the full tank sensor 530SE is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. When the ON signal of the full tank sensor 530SE is input, the main CPU 301 displays, for example, a message “hopper full error” on the liquid crystal display device 30, and shifts to an error state. When the message is displayed, for example, after the salesclerk of the game arcade collects the medals of the auxiliary storage unit 530, the error state is canceled by operating the reset button 512.

  The power switch 511SW is switched to the ON state or the OFF state by the operation of the power button 511. When the power switch 511SW is ON, power is supplied from the power supply 510 to the gaming machine 1, and when the power switch 511SW is OFF, power from the power supply 510 to the gaming machine 1 is shut off. Power supply device 510 generates a DC voltage when power is supplied. The direct current voltage generated by the power supply device 510 is supplied to various devices including the hopper 520 via the power supply substrate 500.

  The reset switch 512SW is provided in the power supply device 510, and outputs a reset signal to the main control board 300 when the reset button 512 is operated. The reset signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. When the main CPU 301 receives the reset signal, the main CPU 301 initializes a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303, and cancels an error state, for example. A plurality of reset switches 512SW (reset button 512) may be provided. For example, in addition to the reset switch 512SW provided in the power supply device 510, the locking device 4 may be provided with a reset switch. In the above configuration, for example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking device 4 and the key is rotated to the right, the front door 3 is unlocked and when the key is rotated to the left, the reset signal from the reset switch The configuration to be output is preferably adopted.

  The setting change switch 37SW illustrated in FIG. 6 detects an operation of the setting change button 37. The ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input to the main control board 300. When the ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input, the main CPU 301 updates the display of the setting display unit 36. When the ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input during a period when the setting value is not displayed on the setting display unit 36, the main CPU 301 performs a predetermined operation as in the case where the reset signal is input from the reset switch 512SW. It may be configured to perform a reset operation.

  The medal sensor 34SE detects a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 8. Specifically, the medal sensor 34SE outputs an ON signal when the medal is positioned inside the selector 34 in the medal passage. On the other hand, when the medal is not located inside the selector 34, the medal sensor 34SE outputs an OFF signal. The ON / OFF signal from the medal sensor 34SE is input to the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. In addition to the medal sensor 34SE of the selector 34 described above, a medal sensor may be provided on the inserted medal guide member 522 located downstream of the selector 34. In the above configuration, when the ON signal of the medal sensor of the inserted medal guide member 522 is input after the ON signal of the medal sensor 34SE of the selector 34 is input, the main CPU 301 determines that the medal has been inserted. It is also good. On the other hand, for example, after the ON signal of the medal sensor 34SE of the selector 34 is input, when the ON signal of the medal sensor of the inserted medal guide member 522 is not input, there is a possibility that the medals stay in the medal flow path The main CPU 301 may notify of an error because it is present.

  On / off signals from the plurality of stop switches 25SW (25SWL, 25SWC, 25SWR) are input to the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. Among the stop switches 25SW, the stop switch 25SWL corresponds to the stop button 25L, the stop switch 25SWC corresponds to the stop button 25C, and the stop switch 25SWR corresponds to the stop button 25R. The main CPU 301 controls the stop of the reel 12 corresponding to the stop switch 25SW to which the ON signal is input. Specifically, when the ON signal is input from the stop switch 25 SWL, stop control of the reel 12 L is performed. Similarly, when the ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWC, the main CPU 301 controls the stop of the reel 12C, and when the ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWR, the main CPU 301 controls the stop of the reel 12R.

  The start switch 24SW detects the operation of the start lever 24 by the player. The ON signal from the start switch 24SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the start switch 24SW is input, the main CPU 301 controls the respective stepping motors 101 to rotate the respective reels 12, for example. Further, the ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input to the main control board 300.

  The start switch 24SW of the present embodiment is formed so as to detect the direction in which the start lever 24 is operated. Specifically, the start switch 24SW can individually detect any one of a push-up operation, push-down operation, push-down operation, push-down operation, push-down operation, and left-hand operation. is there. For example, the start switch 24SW outputs the ON signal when the start lever 24 is operated to be pushed up, the start switch 24SWD outputs the ON signal when the operation is operated to be pressed, and the ON when the right side is operated. It comprises a plurality of sensors including a start switch 24 SWR for outputting a signal and a start switch 24 SWL for outputting an ON signal when operated to the left. According to the above configuration, for example, the effects to be performed can be differentiated between when the start lever 24 is pressed and when it is pressed.

<Sub control board>
The sub control board 400 controls the liquid crystal display device 30, the speakers (31, 32) and each lamp (for example, the effect lamp 28). As shown in FIG. 6, the sub control substrate 400 is configured of a plurality of substrates including an effect control substrate 410, an image control substrate 420, and a sound substrate 430. The sub control board 400 also includes various sensors including the effect button switch 26SW and the direction specifying switch 27SW, the housing lamp 5, the effect lamp 28, the stop operation order display lamp 29, and the lever effect lamp 42. Various lamps including the lamp are electrically connected.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the effect control board 410 includes an I / F circuit 411, a sub CPU 412, a sub ROM 413, and a sub RAM 414. The effect control board 410 (sub CPU 412) controls various types of lamps including the housing lamp 5, the effect lamp 28, the stop operation order display lamp 29, and the lever effect lamp 42 and the sound board 430. Further, the effect control board 410 gives the image control board 420 a command to cause the liquid crystal display device 30 to display each image.

  The sub ROM 413 stores a control program executed by the sub CPU 412 and various data. For example, the sub ROM 413 stores an effect lottery table for determining the type of effect and lamp data indicating a blinking pattern of various lamps.

  The sub RAM 414 functions as a work area for storing various data in a volatile manner. The I / F circuit 411 receives a command from the main control board 300 (I / F circuit 305). The command received by the I / F circuit 411 is supplied to the sub CPU 412. The command received by the I / F circuit 411 is, for example, a display winning combination command indicating the type of winning combination stopped on the activated line.

  The sub CPU 412 executes the control program stored in the sub ROM 413, and controls various lamps (for example, the housing lamp 5) and the sound substrate 430 based on each data stored in the sub ROM 413. For example, the sub CPU 412 reads data indicating a blinking pattern of the housing lamp 5 from the sub ROM 413 and blinks the housing lamp 5. Further, the sub CPU 412 generates a random number value R4 used in effect control processing described later. For example, random numbers in the range of 0 to 65535 are suitably adopted as the random value R4. The sub ROM 413 may be configured by a single electronic component or may be configured by a plurality of electronic components (storage devices).

  The image control board 420 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display various images in response to a command from the effect control board 410. As shown in FIG. 6, the image control board 420 includes an image control CPU 421, an image control ROM 422, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 423, a CGROM 424, and a VRAM 425.

  The image control CPU 421 executes the control program stored in the image control ROM 422, and gives the VDP 423 an instruction according to the command from the effect control board 410. The CGROM 424 stores compression-coded image data (for example, texture data). The VDP 423 is configured to include an image decoder and a drawing circuit (all not shown). When an instruction from the image control CPU 421 is input to the VDP 423, the image decoder reads image data from the CGROM 424 in accordance with the instruction. The image decoder decompresses (decodes) the read image data and stores the image data in the VRAM 425. The drawing circuit causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display various images in accordance with the image data stored in the VRAM 425.

  The sound substrate 430 is controlled by the sub CPU 412 to generate an acoustic signal. The acoustic signal generated by the sound substrate 430 is supplied to the speaker 31 and the speaker 32, and is output as a sound wave. As shown in FIG. 6, the sound board 430 includes a sound source IC 431 and a sound source ROM 432. The sub CPU 412 controls the sound board 430 (sound source IC 431) according to a command from the main control board 300.

  The sound source ROM 432 compresses and stores a plurality of sound data. Each sound data is, for example, data indicating a music in a specific gaming state, a sound output each time the player operates the stop button 25, and each sound including an error sound output in an error state.

  The sound source IC 431 generates an acoustic signal from the sound data of the sound source ROM 432. The sound source IC 431 is configured to include a decoder, a control register, and an A / D converter (all not shown). The decoder of the sound source IC 431 reads acoustic data from the sound source ROM 432 in response to an instruction from the sub CPU 412. Also, after adjusting the volume of the read sound data, the decoder of the sound source IC 431 stores the sound data in the control register. A plurality of sound data is stored in the control register, and each sound data stored in the control register is supplied to the A / D converter in the order of storage. The A / D converter generates an acoustic signal from the acoustic data and supplies it to the amplifier 433. The amplifier 433 amplifies the acoustic signal supplied from the sound source IC 431 (A / D converter) and supplies the amplified signal to the speaker 31 and the speaker 32. The CPU for controlling the sound source IC 431 may be provided separately from the sub CPU 412 and the image control CPU 421.

<Each data used by the main CPU>
The description of each circuit of the gaming machine 1 is as described above. Hereinafter, various data stored in the main ROM 302 will be described using the drawings. In the main ROM 302, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 7, the symbol code table shown in FIG. 8, the winning area lottery table shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination determination table shown in FIG. Various data including the transition symbol definition table shown in FIG. 18, the instruction determination table shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the rotating drum effect determination table shown in FIG. 23, and the AT determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 7 is a conceptual view of a symbol arrangement table. The symbol arrangement table associates the symbol position with the type of symbol of the symbol position. Each symbol position ("00" to "20") of the symbol arrangement table corresponds to each frame of each reel 12, and each symbol of the symbol arrangement table corresponds to each symbol drawn on the reel 12 shown in FIG. It corresponds. The symbol position located on the middle line during rotation is stored in the symbol counter of the main RAM 303.

  FIG. 8 is a conceptual view of a symbol code table. The symbol code table is configured to include symbol codes for identifying each symbol of each reel 12. As understood from FIG. 7, in each reel 12, "Red Seven" "Black BAR" "White BAR" "Replay x" "Replay y" "Bell" "Star Bell" "Plum" "Watermelon" "Cherry" 10 kinds of symbols are arranged. As shown in FIG. 8, each symbol code corresponds to each symbol. Specifically, "00000001" of symbol code 01 corresponds to "red seven", "00000010" of symbol code 02 corresponds to "black BAR", and "white BAR" corresponds to "symbol 07" 00000011 corresponds, “Replay x” corresponds to “00000100” of symbol code 04, “Replay y” corresponds to “00000101” of symbol code 05, and “Bell” corresponds to “symbol 100” "00000110" corresponds, "star bell" corresponds to symbol code 07 "00000111", "plum" corresponds to symbol code 08 "00001000", and "watermelon" symbol code “00001001” of 09 corresponds, and “00001010” of the symbol code 10 corresponds to “cherry”. The symbol code is used, for example, in priority storage processing described later.

  FIG. 9 is a conceptual view of a winning area lottery table. The main CPU 301 determines a winning area by using a winning area lottery table and a random number value R1 in an internal lottery process described later. As shown in FIG. 9, each winning area lottery table is configured to include a plurality of winning areas and each lottery value corresponding to each winning area. FIG. 9 shows the names of the respective winning areas. The winning area lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 for each set value (1 to 6). FIG. 9 exemplifies a winning area lottery table to be referred to in the case of the setting value “1”.

  Each winning area of the winning area lottery table designates each winning combination defined in the winning combination determination table shown in FIG. In FIG. 10, the replay is simply described as "rip". Similarly, in other figures, replay may be abbreviated as "rip".

  For example, it is assumed that "batting order replay X 1" of the winning area number "01" is determined in the internal lottery process. As shown in FIG. 10, the winning area number “01” designates the winning combination “normal replay” and the winning combination “RT2 transition replay”. That is, in the game in which the winning area “strike order replay X1” is won, a plurality of types of winning combinations are redundantly designated. The combination of symbols of winning combinations designated in the winning area is permitted to stop on the activated line.

  Each lottery value of the winning area lottery table is subtracted to random number value R1 in the internal lottery process. Specifically, in the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 subtracts each lottery value corresponding to each winning area from the random number value R1 in ascending order of the winning area (in order of “00” to “32”). In the internal lottery process, a winning area in which the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random value R1 is a negative number is determined. The probability of becoming a negative number when the random number value R1 is subtracted is higher as the lottery value is larger, so the probability of winning as the winning area is larger among the winning areas is higher.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the winning area lottery table is configured to include lottery values for each RT state. Each RT state includes the RT0 state, the RT1 state, the RT2 state, and the RT3 state. Each RT state shifts when the RT transition symbol described later is stopped and displayed on the effective line. The main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value corresponding to the RT state to the random value R1. Therefore, the probability that each winning area is won corresponds to the RT state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning area lottery table includes the respective lottery values in the bonus operating state. A transition to the bonus operation state is made when the symbol combination relating to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line. When the main CPU 301 does not stop display on the activated line in the game in which the bonus combination is won, the main CPU 301 shifts to an internal state in which the state in which the bonus combination is won is maintained. As understood from FIG. 9, in the internal middle state, the bonus combination and the batting replay (X, Y) are not won. Further, in each game in the bonus activated state, “small role ALL” of the winning area number “30” is won.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the game in which the winning area “small role ALL” is won, upper bells 1 to 8 and middle bell (hereinafter referred to as “bell role”), one sheet A and one sheet B (hereinafter “chance And the cherry blossoms and the middle row cherries (hereinafter referred to as “cherry roles”) and the watermelon role are permitted to stop on the effective line. However, the symbol combination related to the bell combination is prioritized and displayed on the activated line over the symbol combination related to the chance combination, the cherry combination and the watermelon combination.

  The prescribed number of bet medals in the bonus activated state is 3, and the bonus activated state ends when 297 medals are paid out. When the bonus operation state ends, the main CPU 301 shifts to the RT0 state.

  As understood from FIG. 9, each lottery value of the winning area numbers “01” to “11” (hereinafter referred to as “replay winning area”) is different for each RT state. More specifically, in the RT0 state, as shown in FIG. 9, a lottery value "8978" is allocated to the win area of "normal replay" among the replay win areas, and the lottery values of the other replay win areas are It is "0". That is, in the RT0 state, “normal replay” is won among the replay winning areas.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the RT1 state, a lottery value "748" is allocated to each winning area of "playing order replays X1 to X6" among the replaying game winning areas, and a lottery value "8" is allocated to the winning area of "BAR Replay". Is assigned, the lottery value “4490” is assigned to the “normal replay” winning area, and the lottery values for the other replayable game winning areas are the numerical value “0”. That is, in the RT1 state, the batting order replays X1 to X6, the normal replay, and the BAR replay are won in the replaying game winning area. Also, the probability that any winning area of the re-game winning area is determined is 8986 (748 × 6 + 8 + 4490) / 65536.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the RT2 state, a lottery value “7670” is allocated to each winning area of “playing order replays Y1 to Y3” of the replay winning areas, and a lottery value “23010” is selected for the “normal replay” winning area. Is assigned, and the lottery value of the other replay winning area is the numerical value "0". That is, in the RT2 state, the batting order replays Y1 to Y3 and the “normal replay” are won in the replaying game winning area. Also, the probability that any winning area of the re-game winning area is determined is 46020 (7670 × 3 + 23010) / 65536.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the RT3 state, the lottery value "46020" is assigned to the winning area of "normal replay" among the replay winning areas, and the lottery value of the other replay winning areas is the numerical value "0". . That is, in the RT3 state, “normal replay” is won among the replay winning areas. Also, the probability that any winning area of the re-game winning area is determined is 46020/65536.

  As understood from the above description, the winning probability of the RT2 state and the RT3 state re-game winning area is higher than that of the RT0 state and the RT1 state re-game winning area. Further, as understood from FIG. 9, the lottery values of the winning area numbers “12” to “31” (hereinafter referred to as “winning winning area”) and the winning area number “32” are common to each RT state. That is, the winning probability of the winning prize area is equal in each RT state. Therefore, the RT2 state and the RT3 state are higher in the winning probability of the winning combination than the RT0 state and the RT1 state, and are an RT state advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 11 is a conceptual view of a winning combination definition table. The winning combination definition table defines combinations of symbols which are permitted to stop on the activated line in the game in which each winning combination is won. For example, in a game in which the winning combination "middle bell" is won, it is permitted to stop the combination of the symbols "bell-bell-bell" on the active line.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the winning combination provision table is configured to include the permission bit number of each winning combination and the payout number of medals when the symbol combination related to each winning combination is stopped at the valid line. FIG. 11 shows the number of payouts when the symbol combination relating to each winning combination is stopped on the active line in the gaming state in which the prescribed number is three. When a plurality of winning combinations are selected in duplicate, the winning combination with the larger number of payouts is preferentially displayed on the activated line. In addition, Replay is displayed on the activated line as a stop prior to other winning combinations, and the bonus combination has a lower priority than the other winning combinations.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the winning combinations "middle bell", "upper bells 1 to 8", "watermelon roles", "corner cherries", "middle cherries", "one piece A" and "one piece B" When the symbol combination relating to the winning combination designated in the played game is displayed on the activated line, medals of the number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination are awarded to the player. In the present embodiment, the winning combination in which the medal is paid out when displayed on the activated line is referred to as a "winning winning combination". In addition, “RT3 transition replay”, “RT2 transition replay”, “control replay 1 to 3”, “BAR replay”, and “normal replay” (a winning combination designated in the game in which the replay winning area is won) are displayed on the effective line. Then, the next game is set to replay. In the present embodiment, the winning combination in which the next game is to be replayed when displayed on the activated line is generically called “replay”.

  Each permission bit number of the winning combination definition table designates each display permission bit of the display permission bit storage area of the main RAM 303. The display permission bit storage area is configured to include a plurality of display permission bits, and each display permission bit corresponds to each winning combination. For example, when the batting order bell L1 of the winning area number "12" is won, and each symbol combination of the winning combination "middle bell", "upper bell 1" and "upper bell 4" is permitted to stop at the effective line (See FIG. 10). In the above case, each display permission bit designated by the permission bit numbers “8”, “9” and “12” of the display permission bit storage area is set to “1”, and the others are set to “0”.

  The main RAM 303 stores a display combination storage area to be compared with the display permission bit storage area in display determination processing described later. The display combination storage area is configured to include a plurality of displayable bits, and each displayable bit corresponds to each winning combination (similar to the display permission bit storage area). Further, each displayable bit is set to “1” when there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the winning combination corresponding to the displayable bit may stop on the valid line, and the symbol combination related to the corresponding winning combination is valid Set to '0' if there is no possibility of stopping on the line. For example, when each reel 12 starts to rotate, all the displayable bits are set to “1” since there is a possibility that symbol combinations relating to all winning combinations will stop on the valid line. Also, each displayable bit of the display combination storing area is updated each time each reel 12 stops, and when all the reels 12 stop, it corresponds to the symbol combination related to the winning combination actually stopped on the effective line. Only the displayable bit is "1".

  The winning combination won in the internal lottery process is stopped on the active line according to the operation mode of each stop button 25 of the player. Specifically, each winning combination is stopped on the active line according to the stop operation position of each stop button 25 and the order of the stop operation. For example, symbols located within a range of 4 frames (5 frames including the stop operation position) from the stop operation position (hereinafter referred to as "pull-in range") can stop on the effective line, Even if it is a symbol constituting the winning combination, it is not stopped on the activated line (a so-called "dropout" occurs). Further, as described above, in one game, a plurality of types of winning combinations may be won in duplicate. In a game in which a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, for example, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination according to the order of the stop operation is stopped at the effective line.

  FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 are explanatory views of the correspondence relationship between the winning area, the stop operation order, and the winning combination (combination of symbols stopped at the valid line) to be stopped at the valid line.

  FIG. 12 is a view for explaining the winning combinations (replays) to be stopped on the activated line in each stop operation order in the game in which the re-game winning area is won. As shown in FIG. 12, when any of the winning areas “strike order replays X1 to X6” is won, “normal replay” or “RT2 transition replay” is stopped at the effective line according to the mode of the stop operation. Specifically, in the game in which the winning area “strike order replay X1” is won, the stop operation order in which the reel 12L is subjected to the first stop operation, the reel 12C is subjected to the second stop operation, and the reel 12R is subjected to the third stop operation In the case of “stop middle operation order”, the symbol combination according to the winning combination “RT2 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, in the game in which the winning area “strike order replay X1” is won, when the stop operation is performed in an order other than “left middle right”, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the game in which the winning area "batting order replay X2" is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right and left", the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "RT2 transition replay" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Ru. On the other hand, in the game in which the winning area “strike order replay X2” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order other than “right and left middle”, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In addition, in the game where the winning area “strike order replay X3” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle left and right”, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “RT2 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, in the game in which the winning area “strike order replay X3” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order other than “middle left and right”, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Similarly, in the game in which the winning area "batting order replay X 4" is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle right left", the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "RT2 transition replay" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, in the game in which the winning area "batting order replay X 4" is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order other than "middle right left", the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "normal replay" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In the game where the winning area "Sequence replay X5" is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right and left middle", the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "RT2 transition replay" is stopped and displayed on the effective line, other than "right left middle" When the stop operation is performed in the order, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the activated line. In the game where the winning area "bats order replay X6" is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right middle left", the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "RT2 transition replay" is stopped and displayed on the effective line, "right middle left" When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the above, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "normal replay" is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  As shown in FIG. 12, when any of the winning areas “strike replay Y1 to Y3” is won, the symbol combination pertaining to “normal replay” or “RT3 transition replay” is stopped at the effective line according to the mode of the stop operation. Do. Specifically, in the game where the winning area “strike order replay Y1” is won, when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “RT3 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, in the game in which the winning area “strike order replay Y1” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order other than the left first stop, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In addition, in the game where the winning area “strike order replay Y2” is won, when the stop operation is performed at the first middle stop, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “RT3 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, in the game where the winning area “strike order replay Y2” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order other than the middle first stop, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Similarly, in the game in which the winning area "batting order replay Y3" is won, when the stop operation is performed at the first right stop, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "RT3 transition replay" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, in the game in which the winning area “strike order replay Y3” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order other than the first right stop, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the case where the BAR replay is won and the first right stop is performed, the symbol combination relating to the “BAR replay” or the “normal replay” is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the game in which the BAR replay is won, in the case of the first right stop operation, the "Replay x" symbol or "Replay y" symbol of the right reel 12R, the "Replay x" symbol of the middle reel 12C, When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "cherry" symbol of the left reel 12L is positioned within the lead-in range, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "BAR Replay" is stopped and displayed. For example, in a game in which BAR replay is won, the "cherry" symbol of symbol position "10" of left reel 12L, the "replay x" symbol of symbol position "15" of middle reel 12C, and the symbol position of right reel 12R The symbol combination with the "Replay x" symbol (see FIG. 4) of 18 "can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. When the above symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the symbol combination of "white BAR-white BAR-white BAR" is stopped and displayed on the upper line. That is, in the game in which the BAR replay is won, the symbol combination of "white BAR-white BAR-white BAR" is stopped and displayed according to the mode of the stop operation.

  On the other hand, in the case where the first right stop operation is performed in the game in which the BAR replay is won, and the reel 12R is not stopped at the timing when the "cherry" symbol is positioned within the lead-in range, the winning combination " The symbol combination relating to the "normal replay" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game in which the BAR replay is won, when the left first stop operation or the middle first stop operation is performed, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation position. When the winning area “normal replay” is won, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed in any stop operation order.

  FIG. 13 is a view for explaining a winning combination for stopping on the activated line in each stop operation order in the game in which the winning area “bats order bell” (L1 to L4, C1 to C4, R1 to R4) is won. When the winning area "batning bell" is determined, one of the winning combination "middle bell" and the winning combination "upper bell 1 to 8" is designated as the winning combination (see FIG. 10). As understood from FIG. 13, in the game in which the winning area “bating bell” has been won, one of the symbol combinations relating to the winning combination “middle bell” or the winning combination “upper bell” is made effective according to the stop operation order. Stop. In the present embodiment, the stop operation order in which the winning combination is stopped is referred to as the correct order of the winning combination. The correct pushing order of the middle bell when the batting bell L (1 to 4) is won is the left first stop. The correct order for the middle bell when the batting bell C (1 to 4) is won is the first stop, and the middle bell correct order for the winning bell R (1 to 4) is: Right first stop. The batting order bell L, the batting order bell C and the batting order bell R have equal winning probabilities. Therefore, the left first stop, the middle first stop, and the right first stop are equal to each other in the correct order of the middle bell with equal probability.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the case of the first middle stop operation in the game in which the winning area "batning bell L1" is determined, stop control is performed to draw the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" to the active line. The symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" is stopped and displayed on the activated line at any stop operation position. On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25L, stop control is performed to draw the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 1" or "upper bell 4" into the effective line.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the game where the winning area "batning bell L2" is determined, in the case of the first left stop operation, stop control is performed to draw in the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" to the active line. On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25L, stop control is performed to draw the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “upper bell 2” or “upper bell 3” into the effective line. Similarly, in the game where the winning area "batning bell L3" is won, in the case of the left first stop operation, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" is stopped on the activated line regardless of the stop operation position, When any button other than the stop button 25L is operated first, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 5" or "upper bell 8" is stopped. In the game where the winning area "batning bell L4" is won, in the case of the first left stop operation, regardless of the stop operation position, the symbol combination pertaining to the winning combination "middle bell" is stopped on the activated line, and stops first When any button other than the button 25L is operated, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “upper bell 6” or “upper bell 7” is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the case of the middle first stop operation in the game in which the winning area “battle bell C1” is determined, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination “middle bell” is stopped on the activated line. On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25C, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 1" or "upper bell 6" is stopped. In addition, in the game where the winning area "batning bell C2" is determined, in the case of the first stop operation, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" is stopped on the activated line at any stop operation position. . On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25C, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 2" or "upper bell 5" is stopped. Similarly, in a game where the winning area "batning bell C3" is won, in the case of the first stop operation, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" is stopped on the activated line regardless of the stop operation position, If any button other than the stop button 25C is operated first, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 3" or "upper bell 8" is stopped. In the game where the winning area "bating bell C4" is won, in the case of the first stop operation, regardless of the stop operation position, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" stops on the activated line and stops first When any button other than the button 25C is operated, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 4" or "upper bell 7" is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the game where the winning area "batning bell R1" is determined, in the case of the right first stop operation, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" is stopped on the activated line. On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25R, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 1" or "upper bell 7" is stopped. In addition, in the game where the winning area "batning bell R2" is determined, in the case of the first right stop operation, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" is stopped on the activated line at any stop operation position. . On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25R, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 2" or "upper bell 8" is stopped. Similarly, in the game where the winning area "batning bell R3" is won, in the case of the first right stop operation, regardless of the stop operation position, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" is stopped on the activated line, When any button other than the stop button 25R is operated first, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 3" or "upper bell 5" is stopped. In the game where the winning area "bating bell R4" is won, in the case of the first right stop operation, regardless of the stop operation position, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "middle bell" stops on the activated line and stops first When any button other than the button 25R is operated, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination "upper bell 4" or "upper bell 6" is stopped. However, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 1 to 8” is dropped depending on the stop operation position.

  As understood from the above description, in the game in which the winning area "batning bell" is won, the symbol combination relating to the "middle bell" (the number of payouts is nine) is effective when the stop operation is performed in the correct order. Stop at the line. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed other than the correct pressing order, the missing eye may stop on the effective line. Therefore, when a game is played in the correct order, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the game is performed other than the correct order. Although described later in detail, when the main CPU 301 is in the AT state, the correct push order of the middle bell is notified.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing a winning combination for stopping on the pay line at each stop operation position (timing of stop operation) in the game in which each winning area is won. FIG. 14 shows a winning area and a winning combination (display winning combination) that can be stopped on the activated line in the game in which the winning area is won. Further, in FIG. 14, a stop operation position at which each symbol constituting each winning combination can be stopped is shown for each reel 12. That is, in FIG. 14, the pull-in range of each symbol constituting each winning combination is shown for each reel 12. As described above, the stop operation position is the symbol position on the effective line (middle line) when the stop operation is performed. The pull-in range is 4 frames (5 frames including the stop operation position) from the stop operation position. Therefore, the drawing-in range of the symbol position "N" (N is an integer from the numerical value "0" to the numerical value "20") of each reel 12 (L, C, R) is the symbol position "N-4" to "N". N ”.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “watermelon” is won, the watermelon combination “star bell-watermelon-black BAR” is stopped and displayed on the effective line depending on the stop operation position. Specifically, the symbol positions "9" to "13" (drawing range of the star bell symbol of the symbol position "13") or the symbol positions "16" to "20" (drawing of the star bell symbol of the symbol position "20") And the middle reel 12C is stopped at the symbol positions "9" to "13" (drawing range of the watermelon pattern at the symbol position "13"), and the symbol position "19". When the right reel 12R is operated to stop at “20” and “0” to “2” (drawing range of black BAR symbol at symbol position “2”), the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, when the reel 12 is operated to stop at a position other than the above-mentioned stop operation position, the watermelon combination is dropped (the missing eye stops).

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “weak cherry” is won, the corner cherry “white BAR-replay x-bell” is stopped and displayed on the effective line depending on the stop operation position. Specifically, when the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “7” to “11” (drawing range of the white BAR symbol at the symbol position “11”), the corner cherry tree is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, when the left reel 12L is operated to stop at a position other than the symbol positions "7" to "11", the corner cherry is dropped. In addition, the middle symbol of corner cherry is a replay x symbol, and the right symbol is a bell symbol. All symbol positions ("0" to "20") of the middle reel 12C are of any replay x symbols (replay x symbols of symbol positions "2" "7" "10" "15" or "20") It becomes a pull-in range, and all the symbol positions of the right reel 12R become pull-in ranges of any bell symbols (bell symbols of symbol positions “4”, “7”, “12”, “15” or “20”). That is, each symbol other than the left reel 12L of the corner cherry is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the stop operation position.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “strong cherry” is won, the middle row cherry “cherry-replay x-bell” is stopped and displayed on the effective line according to the stop operation position. Specifically, when the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “6” to “10” (drawing range of the cherry symbol at the symbol position “10”), the middle row cherry is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, when the left reel 12L is operated to stop at a position other than the symbol positions "6" to "10", the middle cherry is dropped. In addition, like the corner cherry, the middle symbol of the middle row cherry is a replay x symbol, and the right symbol is a bell symbol. Therefore, each symbol other than the left reel 12L of the middle row cherry is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the stop operation position.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “weak chance eyes” is won, the one-piece combination A “replay y-red seven-watermelon” is stopped and displayed on the effective line depending on the stop operation position. Specifically, the left reel 12L is stopped at symbol positions "3" to "7" (replay y of symbol position "7", and symbol positions "1" to "5" (symbols) The middle reel 12C is stopped at the red seven symbol draw-in range of the position "5" or at the symbol positions "14" to "18" (the red seven symbol draw-in range of the symbol position "18"), and the symbol position " When the right reel 12R is stopped at 18 "to" 20 "," 0 "," 1 "(drawing position of the watermelon pattern at the symbol position" 1 "), the one-piece winning combination A is stopped and displayed on the effective line . On the other hand, when the reel 12 is operated to stop at a position other than the above-described stop operation position, the one-piece winning combination A is dropped.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “high chance eye” is won, the one-piece combination B “Replay y-Red Seven-Cherry” is stopped and displayed on the activated line according to the stop operation position. Specifically, the left reel 12L is stopped at symbol positions "3" to "7" (replay y of symbol position "7", and symbol positions "1" to "5" (symbols) The middle reel 12C is stopped at the red seven symbol draw-in range of the position "5" or at the symbol positions "14" to "18" (the red seven symbol draw-in range of the symbol position "18"), and the symbol position " The right reel 12R is stopped and operated from 5 "to" 9 "(draw-in range of cherry pattern at symbol position" 9 ") or at symbol positions" 13 "to" 17 "(draw-in range of cherry symbol at symbol position" 17 ") In the case of winning, the one-piece combination B is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, when the reel 12 is operated to stop at a position other than the above-described stop operation position, the one-piece winning combination B is dropped.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “independent bonus” is won, the bonus combination “red seven-red seven-red seven” is stopped and displayed on the activated line according to the stop operation position. Specifically, the left reel 12L is stopped at symbol positions “1” to “5” (drawing range of red seven symbols at symbol position “5”), and symbol positions “1” to “5” (symbols) The middle reel 12C is stopped at the red seven symbol draw-in range of the position "5" or at the symbol positions "14" to "18" (the red seven symbol draw-in range of the symbol position "18") and the symbol position " When the right reel 12R is stopped at 6 "to" 10 "(drawing range of the red seven symbol at the symbol position" 10 "), the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, when the reel 12 is operated to stop at a position other than the above-described stop operation position, the bonus combination is dropped. However, when the bonus combination is missed in the current game, the bonus combination is maintained in the winning state (inside state) until the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the next and subsequent games.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “overlap bonus” is won, the bonus combination or the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line according to the stop operation position. Specifically, in the game in which the winning area “overlap bonus” is won, the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “1” to “5”, and the symbol positions “1” to “5” or the symbol position “ When the middle reel 12C is stopped at 14 "to" 18 "and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol positions" 6 "to" 10 ", the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In the game in which the winning area "overlap bonus" is won, the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol position "9" to "13" or at the symbol position "16" to "20", and the symbol position "9" to When the middle reel 12C is stopped at "13" and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol positions "19", "20", and "0" to "2", the watermelon role is displayed on the effective line. Be done. If the reel 12 is operated to stop at a position other than the stop operation position where the bonus combination or the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the game in which the duplicate bonus is won, the bonus combination and the watermelon combination are dropped. However, when the bonus combination is missed in the current game, the bonus combination is maintained in the winning state (inside state) until the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the next and subsequent games.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “common bell” is won, the middle bell “star (bell bell) -bell-bell” is stopped and displayed on the effective line. All symbol positions of the left reel 12L may be any bell symbol or star bell symbol (bell symbol of symbol position "3", "8" or "17", star bell symbol of symbol position "13" or "20") It becomes the pull-in range of In addition, all symbol positions of the middle reel 12C become a drawing range of any bell symbol (bell symbol of symbol position “1” “4” “9” “12” or “17”), and all of the right reel 12R The symbol position of the symbol is the pull-in range of any bell symbol (bell symbol of symbol positions “4”, “7”, “12”, “15” or “20”). That is, in the game in which the winning area “common bell” is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the stop operation position of each reel 12.

  As understood from the above description, the winning combination may be dropped depending on the stop operation position. If the winning combination is missed, the payout rate decreases, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the above-described gaming machine, the player plays the game in the stop operation mode (so-called small combination recovery hit method, DDT hit method, KKK hit method, etc.) in which the payout rate becomes maximum.

  In the present embodiment, the stop operation mode in which the payout rate is maximized is referred to as the “specific operation mode”. However, although it will be described in detail later, in each game, information (instruction information, instruction effect, navigation effect, which will be described later) that is advantageous for displaying the winning combination in a stop may be notified. The specific operation mode is a stop operation mode in which the payout rate is maximized in each game in which information advantageous to the stop display of the winning combination is not notified.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the specific operation mode. In the specific operation mode of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the stop operation position of the left reel 12L is the symbol position "9" or the symbol position "10", and the stop operation position of the middle reel 12C is the symbol position "9"- The stop operation position of "13" and the right reel 12R is the stop operation mode of the symbol positions "19", "20" and "0" to "2". Further, in FIG. 15, the winning combinations that are stopped and displayed when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode are shown for each of the winning areas.

  The stop operation position (symbol position "9" "10") of the left reel 12L of the specific operation aspect is located in the drawing-in range (symbol position "9" to "13") of the left symbol of watermelon role (see FIG. 14) . In addition, the stop operation position (symbol position "9" to "13") of the middle reel 12C in the specific operation mode corresponds to the draw-in range (symbol position "9" to "13") of the middle symbol of watermelon role and is specified The stop operation position (the symbol position "19" "20" "0"-"2") of the right reel 12R of the operation mode is the pull-in range (the symbol position "19" "20" "0") of the middle symbol of the watermelon role. Match "2"). Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in each game, in the game in which the winning area "watermelon" is won, the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  The stop operation position (the symbol position "9" "10") of the left reel 12L of the specific operation mode is located in the drawing-in range (the symbol position "7" to "11") of the left symbol of the corner cherry (see FIG. 14) . As described above, the middle symbol (Replay x) and the right symbol (bell) of the corner cherry can be stopped on the effective line regardless of the stop operation position. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in each game, in the game in which the weak cherry is won, the corner cherry is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In addition, the stop operation position of the left reel 12L in the specific operation mode is located in the pull-in range (the symbol positions “6” to “10”) of the left symbol of the middle row cherry. As described above, the middle symbol (Replay x) and the right symbol (bell) of the middle row cherry can be stopped on the effective line regardless of the stop operation position. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in each game, in the game in which the strong cherries are won, the middle row cherries are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  The stop operation position (symbol position "9" "10") of the left reel 12L of the specific operation aspect is not located in the drawing-in range (symbol position "3" to "7") of the left symbol of one sheet A (Fig. 14). reference). In addition, the stop operation position (symbol position “9” to “13”) of the middle reel 12C of the specific operation aspect is the pull-in range (symbol position “1” to “5”, “14”) of the middle symbol of one sheet A. The stop operation position (the symbol position "9" to "13") of the right reel 12R in the specific operation mode is not located at "18"), and the drawing-in range (symbol position "18") of the right symbol of one sheet A ~ Not located at "20" "0" "1". If each symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) constituting the winning combination is not stopped within the pull-in range, the winning combination is dropped. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in each game, in the game in which the weak chance is won, the single player A is dropped, and the lost eye is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  The stop operation position of the left reel 12L in the specific operation mode is not located in the pull-in range (the symbol positions “3” to “7”) of the left symbol of the one-piece combination B (see FIG. 14). In addition, the stop operation position of the middle reel 12C in the specific operation mode is not located in the pull-in range (symbol positions “1” to “5”, “14” to “18”) of the middle symbol of one sheet B, The stop operation position of the right reel 12R in the operation mode is not located in the pull-in range (the symbol positions “5” to “9”, “13” to “17”) of the middle symbol of the one-piece combination B. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in each game, in the game in which the strong chance is won, the single player B is dropped, and the lost eye is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  The stop operation position of the left reel 12L in the specific operation mode is not located in the pull-in range (the symbol positions “1” to “5”) of the left symbol of the bonus combination (see FIG. 14). In addition, the stop operation position of the middle reel 12C of the specific operation mode is not located in the pull-in range (symbol position "1" to "5", "14" to "18") of the middle symbol of the bonus combination, and the specific operation mode The stop operation position of the right reel 12R is not located in the drawing-in range (the symbol position "6" to "10") of the right symbol of the bonus combination. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in each game, the bonus combination is dropped in the game in which the single bonus is won, and the lost eye is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in each game, in the game in which the duplicate bonus is won, the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line while the bonus combination is dropped.

  In the game in which the common bell is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the stop operation mode. In addition, in FIG. 15, the winning combination in which the stop display is displayed when the batting bell is won is omitted. As described above, each stop operation order (left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop) becomes the correct order of the middle bell with equal probability (1/3 at the batting order bell winning). Further, although detailed description will be omitted, when the stopping operation is performed in the pushing order in the game in which the batting bell is won, the upper bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability 1/4 regardless of which stopping operation mode. . Therefore, when the correct answer of the middle bell is not notified, the expectation value of the acquired medal in the game in which the batting bell is won is equal in all the stop operation modes. That is, the expectation value of the acquired medal in the game in which the batting bell is won is equal between the specific operation mode and the other stop operation mode.

  As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in each game, each winning combination including the watermelon combination, the square cherry, and the middle row cherry is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in each game, each winning combination including the one-piece combination A and the one-piece combination B is dropped. The above configuration can also be said as dropping the watermelon part, the corner cherry and the middle cherry when the one-piece A or the one-piece B is stopped and displayed in the effective line. For example, the probability "819/65536" (see FIG. 9) that the corner cherry (weak cherry) will be elected is the probability "243/65536" that one player A will be elected and the probability that one player B will be elected "100/65536 Higher than the total of "343/65536". Further, the payout number “2” of the square cherry is larger than the payout number “1” of the one sheet A and the one sheet B. As understood from the above description, in each game in which information advantageous to the stop display of the winning combination is not notified, the expected value (outgoing ball rate) of the acquired medal when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode is the specific operation It becomes larger than the expectation value of the acquired medal at the time of carrying out stop operation by other than a mode (for example, stop operation mode which one-piece A stops). In the normal state described later, the player usually performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode.

  As described above, the RT state is configured to include the RT0 state to the RT3 state. Moreover, RT state transfers, when RT transfer design is displayed on an effective line. Specifically, when the RT1 transition symbol is displayed on the effective line, the state shifts to the RT1 state. Similarly, when the RT2 transition symbol is displayed on the effective line, the state shifts to the RT2 state, and when the RT3 transition symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the RT3 state.

  FIG. 16 is a conceptual view of an RT transition symbol definition table. As understood from FIGS. 16 and 11, the RT3 transition symbol is a combination of RT3 transition replay symbols. That is, when the symbol combination relating to the RT3 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the right of replay is granted, and the state shifts to the RT3 state. Similarly, when the symbol combination relating to the RT2 transition replay is stopped and displayed, the right of replay is granted and the state shifts to the RT2 state.

  The RT1 transition symbol is stopped and displayed when the winning combination (middle bell, upper bell) is missed in the game in which the winning area "bating bell" is won. That is, when the stop operation is performed other than the correct pushing order of the batting bell and the stopping operation is performed at the timing when the winning upper bell can not be withdrawn, the RT1 transition symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line. The RT1 transition symbol is not a symbol combination relating to a winning combination.

  Although described later in detail, when the main CPU 301 is in the AT state, the stop operation order in which the RT transition replay is stopped is notified. Further, when the main CPU 301 is in the AT state, by notifying the correct pushing order of the batting bell, the symbol combination relating to the middle bell can be stopped and displayed, and the RT1 transitioned symbol is prevented from being stopped and displayed.

  Main CPU 301 controls indication indicator 16 in accordance with each state including an AT state and a normal state. In the present embodiment, the AT state and the normal state may be collectively referred to as an instruction state. An instruction state flag indicating the current instruction state is stored in the main RAM 303.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the instruction state. As shown in FIG. 17, the instruction state is shifted at a specific timing. For example, the main CPU 301 determines the success or failure of the AT state in each game by AT determination processing. When the AT state is won, the main CPU 301 shifts the instruction state from the normal state to the AT state. Specifically, in a game in which watermelon, weak cherries, weak chance eyes (weak rares) or strong cherries, strong chance eyes (strong rares) are won, the AT state is won with a predetermined probability. When the AT state is won in the normal state game, the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag from the normal state to the AT state (start preparation state), and the initial value "50" to the AT counter indicating the number of remaining games in the AT state. Store The AT counter is provided, for example, in the main RAM 303.

  In each AT state game, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information for instructing the stop operation order. In the present embodiment, in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information for instructing a stop operation order which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state, an instruction of the stop operation order advantageous to the player is not given. Therefore, the AT state is an advantageous indication state for the player as compared to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the AT state includes a start preparation state, an AT in progress state, an end preparation state, and a bonus announcement state. Although the details will be described later, the instruction information that can be displayed on the instruction display 16 may be different for each instruction state.

  When the AT state is won in the normal state, the main CPU 301 shifts to the start preparation state. In the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information for instructing the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the order instructed in the start preparation state, the RT2 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. In addition, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information for instructing the correct pressing order of the middle bell in the start preparation state. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the order instructed in the start preparation state, the RT1 transition symbol is not displayed as a stop on the effective line (the middle bell is not dropped), so the RT2 state does not shift (fall). Furthermore, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information for instructing the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay in the start preparation state after the transition to the RT2 state. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the order instructed in the start preparation state, the RT3 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT3 state, the main CPU 301 shifts from the start preparation state to the AT in progress state. The AT counter indicating the number of remaining games in the AT state is not decremented in the start preparation state.

  In the AT state, the main CPU 301 instructs, as in the start preparation state, the instruction information instructing the correct order of the middle bell and the instruction information instructing the correct order of the RT2 transition replay and the correct order of the RT3 transition replay. Command information to be displayed on the command display 16. Further, the main CPU 301 subtracts the numerical value “1” from the AT counter in each game in the AT state. When the AT counter is decremented to the numerical value “0”, the main CPU 301 shifts from the AT in progress state to the end preparation state. The AT in-progress state is in principle the RT3 state. Therefore, since batting replay X and batting replay Y do not win (see FIG. 9), the correct pushing order of RT2 transition replay and RT3 transition replay is not usually instructed. However, in the game in which the batting bell is won, if the stop operation is performed out of the instructed order (if an operation mistake is made), the RT1 transition symbol may be stopped, and there may be a transition from the RT3 state to the RT1 state. Even in the above case, since the correct push order of the RT2 transition replay and the RT3 transition replay is instructed in the AT state, it is possible to return from the RT1 state to the RT3 state by following the instruction of the instruction information.

  The main CPU 301 executes AT determination processing in the in-AT state and the start preparation state as in the normal state. When the AT state is won in the AT state and the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 adds an AT stock counter (adds the set number). If the AT counter indicating the number of remaining games in the AT state is decremented to the numerical value "0" and the AT stock counter is larger than the numerical value "0", the main CPU 301 re-sets the initial value "50" to the AT counter Set and continue the AT state. In the AT state, it may be determined whether the AT counter is to be added (the number of remaining games added) by lottery.

  As described above, when the batting order bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, instruction information for instructing the correct pushing order of the middle bell is displayed on the instruction display 16. On the other hand, in the end preparation state, when the batting bell is won, the stopping operation is performed either in the middle order of the correct answer of the middle bell or in one stop operation order other than the correct order (hereinafter referred to as "loss order"). Instruction information indicating what should be performed is displayed on the instruction indicator 16. For example, it is assumed that the batting order bell L (the correct answering order for the middle bell is the left first stop) is won in the end preparation state. In the above case, instruction information indicating that the stop display should be performed in the order of either the left first stop (the correct pressing order) or the middle first stop (the lost pressing order), or the left first stop and the right first Instruction information indicating that the stop operation should be performed is displayed on the instruction display 16 in any order of 1 stop (displacement order). In addition, in the preparation for termination state, when the batting order bell C (the middle bell's correct pressing order is the first stop) is won, either the left first stop (the missing push order) or the middle first stop (the correct pressing order) The instruction information for instructing stop display in any order or instruction information for instructing stop operation in any order of middle first stop and right first stop (loss push order) Is displayed on the instruction display 16. Furthermore, if the batting order bell R (the middle bell's correct pressing order is the right first stop) is won in the preparation for ending state, either the left first stop (the missing pushing order) or the right first stop (the correct pressing order). The above-mentioned instruction information which indicates that the stop operation should be performed in the order of 1 or the above-mentioned instruction which indicates that the stop operation should be performed in any order of the middle first stop (loss push order) and the right first stop The instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  In the above configuration, in the end preparation state, both the correct order and the lost order of the middle bell are instructed by the instruction information, and the correct order can not be specified. Therefore, even if the instruction information is displayed, the player may perform the stop operation in the pressing order of the miss. If you stop in the wrong push order, you can drop the batting bell (middle bell, upper bell). When the batting bell is missed, as described above, the RT1 transition symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT1 state in the termination preparation state, the main CPU 301 shifts the instruction state to the normal state. When the RT state when transitioning to the termination preparation state is the RT1 state, the main CPU 301 immediately shifts to the normal state.

  The main CPU 301 randomly determines each winning area including a bonus combination in each game in each instruction state. Further, when the bonus combination is won, that is, when the main CPU 301 transitions to the internal state, the main CPU 301 sets an initial value to the transition counter. The transition counter is provided to shift the instruction state, and is decremented by "1" every game. When the transition counter is decremented to the numerical value "0", the instruction state transitions to the bonus notification state. The transition counter is provided, for example, in the main RAM 303. Moreover, the initial value of the transition counter of this embodiment is a numerical value "3". In the above configuration, the transition counter is decremented to the numerical value "0" in three games from the game in which the bonus combination is won, and the instruction state is shifted to the bonus notification state.

  As described above, the internal state is more disadvantageous to the player than other gaming states (for example, the RT0 state) in that the bonus combination is not won. Therefore, the less the number of games from the transition to the internal state until the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the more advantageous the player is. However, for example, a player (beginner) who is not good at pushing may sometimes need many games to stop and display the bonus combination on the activated line. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the bonus notification state (internal middle state), it is configured that the correct push order of the middle bell is notified.

  Although the details will be described later, continuous effects are executed on the liquid crystal display device 30 over three games after the bonus combination is won. Further, when the continuous effect ends, the notification effect is executed by the liquid crystal display device 30. The continuous effect notifies that it is a chance to win a bonus combination. Further, the notification effect notifies that the bonus combination has been won. Suppose that a configuration without transition counters is provided. In the above configuration, when the bonus combination is won, the normal state is immediately shifted to the bonus notification state. Therefore, in the game in which the continuous effect is executed, the instruction information may be displayed on the instruction display 16, and the correct order of the middle bell may be instructed. Since the instruction information is not displayed in the normal state, when the instruction information is displayed, the player may recognize that the bonus notification state has been entered, even during continuous rendering. That is, the winning of the bonus combination may be substantially notified before the notification effect is executed. In the above case, the fun of continuous rendering is reduced. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, by providing the transition counter, in the game from the winning of the bonus combination to the end of the continuous effect, the normal state is maintained and the instruction information is not displayed. did. According to the above configuration, in the internal middle state, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the fun of the continuous effect is reduced while informing the correct pressing order of the middle bell.

  When the bonus operation state starts, the bonus notification state ends. In addition, when the bonus operation state ends, the instruction state in the game in which the bonus combination is won is shifted (returned). For example, when the bonus combination is won in the normal state, the transition to the normal state is made after the bonus operating state ends. When the bonus combination is won in the AT state, the state shifts to the AT state (start preparation state) after the end of the bonus operation state.

  FIGS. 18 and 19 are conceptual diagrams of the instruction determination tables (A, B, C). In each game, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number according to the instruction determination table, and displays instruction information (“1” to “12”) corresponding to the instruction number on the instruction display 16. In addition, the main CPU 301 transmits a command (a second command described later) indicating an instruction number determined in each game to the sub control board 400 (sub CPU 412). FIGS. 18 and 19 show a simulated view of the instruction display 16 for displaying the instruction information and the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information. As described above, the indication indicator 16 of the present embodiment is a two-digit seven-segment display. In FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, among the segments of each 7-segment display, light emitting segments are shown by hatching.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, each instruction determination table is configured to include each instruction number for each winning area. Each instruction determination table includes an instruction determination table A (FIG. 18A), an instruction determination table B (FIG. 18B), and an instruction determination table C (FIG. 19). The instruction determination table A is used to determine an instruction number of each game in the normal state. The instruction determination table B is used to determine the instruction number of each game in the start preparation state and the AT state, and the instruction determination table C is used to determine the instruction number of each game in the end preparation state Be The instruction determination table B is also used in the bonus notification state.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, in the normal state, the instruction number "99" is determined regardless of which of the winning areas is won. When the instruction number “99” is determined, the instruction display 16 does not display the instruction information. Specifically, when the instruction number "99" is determined, the instruction display 16 is turned off in a period in which the instruction information is displayed. According to the above configuration, in the normal state, the stop operation mode is not instructed in the instruction display 16. However, although described later in detail, in the liquid crystal display device 30, the stop operation mode may be indicated even in the normal state. For example, when the BAR replay is won in the normal state, in the liquid crystal display device 30, an instruction effect for instructing the correct pressing order of the BAR replay is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the batting order replay X1 is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number “01”. When the instruction number "01" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "1" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information" 1 ") as instruction information. Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the batting order replay X2 is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number “02”. When the instruction number “02” is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information “2”. When the batting order replay X3 is won, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number “03” and causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information “3”. When the batting order replay X 4 is won, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number “04” and causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information “4”. When the batting order replay X5 is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “05” and causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “5”. When the batting order replay X6 is won, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number “06” and causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information “6”.

  In the above configuration, when the instruction information “1” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay X1 is won in the current game. Therefore, when the instruction information “1” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation with the correct pressing order “left middle right” (see FIG. 12) of the RT2 transition replay when the batting replay X1 is won. That is, when the instruction information “1” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also stated that the stop operation order “left middle right” is instructed. In addition, when the instruction information “2” is displayed on the instruction indicator 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay X2 has been won in the current game, and therefore, the RT2 transition when the batting order replay X2 is won Correct operation of Replay Stop operation with "right and left middle". That is, when the instruction information "2" is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also stated that the stop operation order "in the left and right" is instructed. Similarly, when the instruction information "3" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the stop operation order "middle left and right" is instructed, and when the instruction information "4" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the stop operation order " When the middle right and left is instructed and the instruction information "5" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the stop operation order "right and left middle" is instructed and the instruction information "6" is displayed on the instruction display 16, The stop operation order "right middle left" is designated. In the above configuration, it can be said that instruction information corresponding to the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (b), when a batting order replay Y1 or batting order bell L (1 to 4) is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number "07". Do. When the instruction number “07” is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information “7”. Further, when the batting order replay Y2 or batting order bell C (1 to 4) is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number “08”. When the instruction number “08” is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information “8”. Furthermore, when a batting order replay Y 3 or batting order bell R (1 to 4) is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number “09”. When the instruction number “09” is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information “9”.

  In the above configuration, when the instruction information “7” is displayed on the instruction indicator 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay Y1 or the batting order bell L has been won in the current game. As described above, the correct pushing order of the RT3 transition replay when the batting replay Y1 is won and the correct pushing order of the middle bell when the batting bell L is won are the first stop on the left in common (see FIG. 12 and FIG. 13). Therefore, when the instruction information “7” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation at the left first stop to stop and display the middle bell or the RT3 transition replay on the effective line. That is, when the instruction information "7" is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also stated that the left first stop is instructed. Also, when the instruction information “8” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay Y2 or batting order bell C has been won in the current game. As described above, the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay when the batting replay Y2 is won and the correct pressing order of the middle bell when the batting bell C is won are the first stop in common. Therefore, when the instruction information "8" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation at the first stop during the middle. That is, when the instruction information “8” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also stated that the middle first stop is instructed. Furthermore, when the instruction information “9” is displayed on the instruction indicator 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay Y3 or batting order bell R has been won in the current game. As described above, the correct pushing order of the RT3 transition replay when the batting replay Y3 is won and the correct pushing order of the middle bell when the batting bell R is won are the first right stop in common. Therefore, when the instruction information "9" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation at the first right stop. That is, when the instruction information "9" is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also stated that the first right stop is instructed. In the above configuration, it can be said that instruction information corresponding to the correct push order of the RT3 transition replay and the correct push order of the middle bell is displayed on the instruction display 16. When the batting order replay or the batting bell other than the batting order is won in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the main CPU 301 determines the command number “99”, and the command display 16 does not display the command information.

  For example, as a comparative example, it is assumed that different pieces of instruction information are displayed for each of the winning areas (winning area numbers) common to the correct pressing order. In the above comparison example, the instruction information for instructing the correct pushing order of the RT3 transition replay when the batting replay Y1 is won, the instruction information for instructing the correct pushing order of the middle bell when the batting bell L1 is won, and the batting order The instruction information for instructing the correct order of the middle bell when the bell L2 is won, the instruction information for instructing the correct order of the middle bell when the batting order L3 is elected, and the middle stage when the batting order L4 is won It is necessary to separately provide instruction information for instructing Bell's correct ordering. That is, in the comparative example, it is necessary to provide five types of instruction information for instructing the left first stop. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, common instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16 for each winning area having the same correct answer order. Therefore, for example, only one type of instruction information for instructing the left first stop is sufficient. According to the above configuration, the number of types of instruction information is reduced as compared with the above-described comparative example.

  FIG. 19 is a conceptual diagram of an instruction determination table C used when determining an instruction number in each game in the end preparation state. As shown in FIG. 19, in the end preparation state, when the batting bell (L, C, R) is won, the main CPU 301 determines one of the instruction numbers “10” to “12”. Specifically, when the batting order bell L (1 to 4) is won in the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "10" with a probability of 1/2, and the instruction number with a probability of 1/2. Determine "11". Further, when the batting order bell C (1 to 4) is won in the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "10" with a probability of 1/2, and the instruction number "12" with a probability of 1/2. Decide. Further, when the batting bell R (1 to 4) is elected in the termination preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "11" with a probability of 1/2, and the instruction number "12" with a probability of 1/2. Decide.

  When the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “10”, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “10”. Further, when the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “11”, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “11” on the instruction display 16, and when the instruction number “12” is determined, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “12”. Display on.

  In the above configuration, when the instruction information "10" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the batting bell L or the batting bell C is won with a probability of about 1/2. As described above, the correct order for the middle bell when the batting bell L is won is the left first stop, and the correct pushing order for the middle bell when the batting bell C is won is the middle first stop. In the above configuration, in the game in which the instruction information “10” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation at the left first stop or the middle first stop. That is, when the instruction information “10” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also stated that it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the middle first stop. Further, when the instruction information “11” is displayed on the instruction indicator 16, the batting bell L or the batting bell R is won with a probability of about 1/2. As described above, when the batting bell R is won, the correct pushing order of the middle bell is the first right stop. In the above configuration, in the game in which the instruction information “11” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation at the left first stop or the right first stop. That is, when the instruction information "11" is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also stated that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the right first stop. Furthermore, when the instruction information "12" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the batting bell C or the batting bell R is won with a probability of about 1/2. In the above configuration, in the game in which the instruction information “12” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation at the middle first stop or the right first stop. That is, when the instruction information “12” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also stated that it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed in the middle first stop or the right first stop.

  As described above, when the batting bell (L, C, R) is won in the end preparation state, a plurality of stop operation orders are instructed. Further, among the instructed stop operation orders, one is the correct push order of the middle bell, and the other is the lost push order. For example, it is assumed that the instruction information “10” is displayed in the game in which the batting bell L is won. In the above case, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the middle first stop, the left first stop is the correct push order of the middle bell, and the middle first stop is the lost push order. On the other hand, when the instruction information "11" is displayed in the game in which the batting bell L is won, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the right first stop, and the left first stop is the correct middle bell It is a push order, and a right first stop is a push order of a lost. Further, it is assumed that the instruction information “10” is displayed in the game in which the batting order bell C is won. In the above case, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the middle first stop, the middle first stop is the correct push order of the middle bell, and the left first stop is the lost push order. On the other hand, when the instruction information “12” is displayed in the game in which the batting bell C is won, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed by the first middle stop or the first right stop, and the middle first stop is the correct middle bell It is a push order, and a right first stop is a push order of a lost. In addition, when the instruction information “11” is displayed in the game in which the batting bell R is won, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the right first stop, and the right first stop is the middle bell correct It is a push order, and the left first stop is a push order of the lost. On the other hand, when the instruction information "12" is displayed in the game in which the batting bell R is won, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed by the first middle stop or the first right stop, and the right first stop is the correct middle bell It is a push order, and a middle 1st stop is a push order of a loss.

  As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the correct order of the middle bell in the game in which the order bell is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order in the game in which the batting bell is won, the RT state may shift from the RT3 state to the RT1 state. When transitioning to the RT1 state, the instruction state transitions from the AT state (end preparation state) to the normal state. That is, in a game in which the batting order bell has been won in the end preparation state, when the correct order of the middle bell and the missing order are instructed and the stop operation is performed in the correct order, the AT state is maintained and the stop is performed in the missing order. If operated, the AT condition may end. In the above configuration, the player can maintain the AT state by continuously applying the correct order of the batting bell. Therefore, for example, the fun of the game can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the state shifts to the normal state immediately when the AT state is ended. Although details will be described later, when the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state, the pressing order effect is executed by the liquid crystal display device 30. Further, as shown in FIG. 19, when the winning area other than the batting bell is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “99” and does not display the instruction information.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the instruction display 16 controlled by the main CPU 301 displays instruction information “1” to “12” for instructing the stop operation mode. In a configuration in which only the device controlled by the sub CPU 412 (for example, the stop operation order display lamp 29) notifies the stop operation mode, if the sub CPU 412 has a problem, the notification of the stop operation mode is not executed There may be a disadvantage that In the present embodiment, since the instruction display 16 controlled by the main CPU 301 displays instruction information, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

  FIG. 20 is a timing chart for explaining instruction information displayed at each time of game. FIG. 20 shows a simulated view of the instruction display 16 at each time point (a game start time, a stop operation time, a winning combination stop time) in one game.

  FIG. 20A shows a specific example in which the batting bell L (1 to 4) is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. As shown in FIG. 20 (a), when the game start operation (the operation of the start lever 24) is performed in the AT state or the start preparation state, immediately after that, the correct pressing order of the middle bell (left first stop The instruction information “7” instructing the) is displayed on the instruction display 16. In the specific example of FIG. 20A, it is assumed that the batting bell L is won and the stop operation is performed at the instructed left first stop. In the above case, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In addition, the indication display 16 continuously displays the indication information “7” until the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In this embodiment, a period from the start operation of the game to the stop display of the symbol combination as a result of the game is referred to as an instruction display period TS.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), when the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the indication display 16 displays the payout number “9” of the middle bell instead of the instruction information. Specifically, when the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the main CPU 301 first causes the indication display 16 to display the number “0”. After that, the main CPU 301 adds up the numbers of the instruction display 16 to the number “9” indicating the number of payouts of the middle bell, and displays the number (0 → 1... 8 → 9). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20A, a period in which the indication display 16 displays the number of payouts is referred to as a payout display period TH. The payout display period TH ends, for example, when a bet medal for the next game is inserted.

  Temporarily, in a configuration in which the instruction display period TS and the payout display period TH are continuous, a configuration in which the number of payouts is displayed immediately after the payout display period TH starts (without displaying the number 0 etc.) Let's assume a comparison example). In the above comparison example, for example, when the middle bell (the number of paid-out sheets is 9) stops on the active line, the numeral "9" is immediately displayed without displaying the numeral "0" to the numeral "8". . When the batting bell R is won, the numeral “9” as instruction information is displayed in the instruction display period TS, and the numeral “9” as the number of dispensed sheets is displayed in the subsequent payout display period TH. That is, in the comparison example, the number "9" is continuously displayed over the instruction display period TS and the payout display period TH. Therefore, since the display of the instruction display unit 16 does not change at the start of the payout display period TH (at the end of the instruction display period TS), it is difficult for some players to recognize the start of the payout display period TH. There may be a disadvantage that it becomes difficult to determine whether the number is instruction information or the number of paid out sheets. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, when the payout display period TH is started, the indication display 16 first displays the number “0”, and thereafter, up to the number “9” indicating the number of payouts. The configuration is to sequentially add and display (variation display of numbers). In the above configuration, when the payout display period TH is started, the number of the indication display 16 is variably displayed, so that the start of the payout display period TH is easily recognized as compared with the above-described comparative example. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. However, the present invention does not exclude the above-described comparative example. That is, when the winning combination is stopped on the active line, the payout number of the winning combination may be displayed immediately.

  In the configuration in which the instruction display 16 displays both the instruction information and the number of payouts, the configuration for preventing confusion between the instruction information and the number of payouts is not limited to the above-described example. For example, when displaying the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction information is displayed, the main CPU 301 temporarily hides the indicator 16 immediately before the display of the number of payouts is started, and then displays the number of payouts. Good. As a specific aspect of the above configuration, instruction information is displayed from the game start operation to immediately before the third stop operation. Also, a period from the time of the third stop operation to the start of medal payout (addition of credits, driving of the hopper 520) (a period in which the reel 12 rotates (slides) the slippage range (slip) and a period of the determination process ), The instruction display 16 is hidden, and then the number of payouts is displayed. According to the above configuration, since the non-display period intervenes between the period in which the instruction information is displayed and the period in which the number of payouts is displayed, confusion between the instruction information and the number of payouts is suppressed. In the above configuration, the payout number may be added and displayed from the numerical value “0” (similar to FIG. 20A), or the numerical value as the payout number (for example, the number “9” in the middle bell) May be displayed immediately. Moreover, the period when the indication indicator 16 is non-display can be changed suitably. For example, the indication display 16 may not be displayed in a period until a predetermined time length (for example, about 0.5 seconds) elapses from the time of the third stop operation.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the game in which the batting bell C (medium first stop is correct pressing order) is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction information “8” (middle first stop) immediately after the start of the game Is displayed on the instruction display 16 and then the middle bell is stopped and the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line, then the number “9”, which is the number of payouts of the middle bell, is displayed on the instruction display 16 Be done. In addition, in a game in which the batting bell R (the right first stop is the correct pressing order) is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction information "9" (the right first stop is instructed) is instructed immediately after the game start. After being displayed on the display 16 and then the first right stop operation is performed and the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the number "9" which is the number of payouts of the middle bell is displayed.

  In addition, when the batting order replay Y1 (the left first stop is the correct pushing order) is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction information "7" immediately after the game starts, as in the case where the batting order bell L is won. Is displayed. Similarly, when batting order replay Y2 (medium first stop is correct pressing order) is won, as in the case where batting order bell C is won, instruction information "8" immediately after the start of the game (teaching first letter stop) Is displayed, and when batting order replay Y 3 (right first stop is correct pushing order) is won, the instruction information “9” immediately after the start of the game is issued (commanding the right first stop as in the case where batting order bell R is won). Is displayed. However, when the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts is not displayed because the medals are not dispensed.

  FIG. 20 (b) is a specific example when the batting bell L is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, as in FIG. 20 (a). However, in the specific example of FIG. 20 (a), it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in the middle push of correct answer (first stop left), whereas in the specific example of FIG. 20 (b) It is assumed that the stop operation is performed in order (middle first stop, right first stop).

  As shown in FIG. 20 (b), when the instruction information "7" is displayed and the first stop operation is performed in the middle pusher with the lost push order, immediately after that, the instruction information "7" is displayed. Instead, the operation error information "-" is displayed on the instruction display 16. The operation error information is displayed on the instruction display unit 16 when the stop operation is performed in the instruction display period TS other than the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information (when the operation error is made). The operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 continuously, for example, until the instruction display period TS ends. The period in which the operation error information is displayed can be changed as appropriate. For example, operation mistake information may be displayed on the indication display 16 only for a predetermined time after an operation mistake is made.

  When the stop operation is performed in the middle push with the middle bell, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the upper bell and the middle bell may be dropped, and the left eye may be stopped and displayed on the effective line. When the lost eye is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the number “0” is displayed on the indication display 16 in the payout display period TH. In the case where the payout number is 0 (for example, when the lost number is stopped and displayed on the activated line), the indication display 16 may be hidden after the game is over.

  On the other hand, even if operation mistake information is displayed on the instruction display 16 due to an operation mistake, the upper bell may be stopped and displayed on the effective line. In the above case, when the upper bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the indication display 16 displays the payout number “9” of the upper bell instead of the operation error information “−−”. Specifically, the operation error information "-" is switched to the numerical value "0", and thereafter, the numerical value of the indication display 16 is added and displayed from the numerical value "0" to the numerical value "9". The display may be switched immediately from the operation error information "-" to the payout number "9" of the upper bell.

  Although illustration is omitted, in a game in which the bat order bell C or the bat order bell R is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, when the first stop operation is performed in the middle bell in the push order of the middle bell, the above-mentioned FIG. Similarly to the specific example of the operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 immediately after the first stop operation. When the batting order replay Y1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, operation error information is displayed on the indication display 16 when the operation other than the left first stop operation is performed. Furthermore, when batting order replay Y2 is won, operation error information is displayed on indication indicator 16 when a command other than the middle first stop operation is made, and when batting order replay Y3 is won, the command other than right first stop operation is carried out. And the operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  FIG. 20C shows a specific example of the batting order replay X1 being won in the AT state or the start preparation state. As shown in FIG. 20C, immediately after the batting order replay X1 is won in the AT state, the indication information “1” indicating the correct pressing order “left middle right” of the RT2 transition replay is displayed on the indication display 16 as shown in FIG. Is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 20C, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in the stop operation order “left middle right” instructed by the instruction information. In the above case, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display unit 16 to continuously display the instruction information “1” in the instruction display period TS, and when the RT2 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the display of the instruction information is ended. Let

  Although illustration is omitted, when any of batting order replay X2 to batting order replay X6 is won in the AT state or start preparation state, as in the case where batting order replay X1 is won, the correct push order of RT2 transition replay is indicated. The instruction information to be displayed is displayed on the instruction display 16. In addition, when any of batting replay X2 to batting replay X6 is won, and the stop operation is performed in the correct order of the RT2 transition replay, in the same manner as when batting replay X1 is won, in the instruction display period TS. The instruction information is continuously displayed on the instruction display 16.

  FIG. 20 (d) is a specific example in the case where the batting order replay X1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state as in FIG. 20 (c). However, in the specific example of FIG. 20 (c), the case where the stop operation is performed with the correct pressing order “left middle right” of the RT2 transition replay is assumed, while in the specific example of FIG. 20 (d) Assume that stop operations are performed in order. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 20D, it is assumed that the first stop operation is performed in an order other than the left first stop (the first stop first and the first right stop). As shown in FIG. 20 (d), when the batting order replay X 1 is won, the instruction information “1” is displayed on the instruction display 16. After that, when the first stop operation is performed in an order other than the left first stop, immediately after the first stop operation, the main CPU 301 changes the instruction information "1" to the operation error information "-" Display on. The operation error information is continuously displayed on the instruction display 16 until the instruction display period TS ends.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the batting order replay X2 is won from the batting order replay X2 in the AT in-progress state or the start preparation state, and the first stop operation is performed in the lost push order of the RT2 transition replay, FIG. As in the specific example of d), the operation error information is displayed on the indication display 16 immediately after the first stop operation.

  FIG. 20 (e) is a specific example in which the batting order replay X1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, as in FIG. 20 (c) and FIG. 20 (d). Further, FIG. 20E assumes, similarly to FIG. 20D, a case where the stop operation is performed at a time other than the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay. However, FIG. 20 (d) is a specific example in the case where an operation mistake is made in the first stop operation, while FIG. 20 (e) is a concrete example in the case where an operation mistake is made in the second stop operation. . As shown in FIG. 20 (e), when the batting order replay X1 is won, the instruction information “1” is displayed on the instruction display 16. After that, when the left first stop operation (the correct pressing order) is performed, the display of the instruction display 16 does not change from the instruction information “1”. If the right second stop operation (missing push order) is performed after the left first stop operation, immediately after that, the operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 instead of the instruction information. Although not shown, when any of the batting order replay X2 to batting order replay X6 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, and the second stopping operation is performed in the lost push order, the second stopping operation is performed. Immediately after the operation error information is displayed on the indication display 16.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information, and the stop button is operated in a mode other than the operation mode indicated by the instruction information (when an operation mistake is made) Information (operation error information) different from the instruction information displayed on the instruction display 16 is displayed on the instruction display 16. According to the above configuration, an operation error can be notified to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation error information is displayed on the indication display 16 immediately after the operation error is made. It is assumed that the operation error information is not displayed immediately after the operation error. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which operation error information is displayed after the third stop operation can be considered. In the above configuration, when the operation error information is displayed after the specific instruction information is displayed, depending on the player, it is determined whether the operation error is performed in the first stop operation or the operation error is performed in the second stop operation. It becomes difficult, and in fact, even if the operation is mistaken in the first stop operation, it may be misidentified as the operation mistake in the second stop operation. That is, there may be a case in which it is mistakenly recognized that no operation mistake has been made in the first stop operation. In the above case, when the above-mentioned specific instruction information is displayed, there may be a disadvantage that the operation may be easily mistaken again in the first stop operation. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the operation error information is displayed immediately after the operation error is made. In the above configuration, the player can easily recognize the point at which the operation mistake is made, and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

  FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a change in the display mode of the indication display 16 in the end preparation state (period in which the pressing order effect is executed). As shown in FIG. 21, also in each game in the end preparation state, a period from the start operation of the game to the stop display of the symbol combination as a result of the game is the instruction display period TS.

  FIG. 21A shows a specific example in which the batting order bell L is won in the end preparation state. As described above, when the batting bell L is won in the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction information “10” or the instruction information “11” by lottery and causes the instruction display 16 to display (see FIG. 19). . FIG. 21A is a specific example in the case where the batting order bell L is won and the instruction information “10” is determined. As described above, when the instruction information “10” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation at the left first stop or the middle first stop. In the specific example of FIG. 21A, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed at the left first stop. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 21A, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in the correct order of the middle bell. When the instruction information "10" is displayed and the stop operation is performed in the correct order, the instruction information "10" is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS.

  FIG. 21 (b) shows a specific example in which the batting order bell C is won in the end preparation state. As described above, when the batting order bell C is won in the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction information “10” or the instruction information “12” by lottery and causes the instruction display 16 to display (see FIG. 19). In the specific example of FIG. 21B, as in FIG. 21A, the case where the instruction information “10” is displayed on the instruction display unit 16 and the case where the stop operation is performed at the first left stop is It is assumed. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 21B, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in the pushing order of the middle bell. When the stop operation is performed in the wrong push order, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), there is a possibility that the upper bell and the middle bell may be dropped. In the case where the instruction information "10" is displayed and the stop operation is performed in the instructed pressing order, the instruction information "10" is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS.

  As described above, when the instruction information “10” (left first stop and middle first stop is indicated) is displayed and the first left stop operation is performed, the first left stop indicates the middle bell correct answer The instruction information "10" is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS regardless of whether the order is made or not. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, when instruction information "10" is displayed (it is the same as FIG. 21 (a) and FIG.21 (b)), and middle 1st stop operation is carried out, inside 1st stop The instruction information “10” is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS, regardless of whether or not the correct order of the middle bell is pressed. In addition, when the instruction information “11” (left first stop and right first stop instructed) is displayed and the left first stop operation or the right first stop operation is performed, the stop operation order is middle. The instruction information “11” is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS regardless of whether or not the bell's correct push order is made. Furthermore, when the instruction information “12” (instruction to stop the first stop and the first right stop) is displayed and the middle first stop operation or the first right stop operation is performed, the stop operation order is middle. The instruction information “12” is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS regardless of whether or not the bell is pressed correctly.

  As understood from the above description, when the instruction information "10" to "12" is displayed and the stop operation is performed in one of the instructed stop operation orders, the stop operation order is the correct answer of the middle bell The instruction information is continuously displayed on the instruction display unit 16 in the instruction display period TS, regardless of the pushing order or the missing pushing order. In the above configuration, it can not be determined from the display of the instruction display 16 in the instruction display period TS whether the current stop operation order is the correct push order or the lost push order.

  Temporarily, when the instruction information “10” to “12” is displayed, the operation error information described above is displayed in place of the instruction information immediately after the stop operation is performed in the instructed push order (hereinafter Let's assume a comparison example). In the above comparative example, immediately after the first stop operation, it is recognized from the display of the instruction display 16 that the stop operation has been performed in the lost push order. In the present embodiment, it can not be determined from the display of the instruction display 16 in the instruction display period TS whether the current stop operation order is the correct push order or the lost push order. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the player's expectation for the correct pressing order is easily maintained in the instruction display period TS, as compared with the above-described comparative example.

  FIG. 21C is a specific example in the case where the batting order bell L is won in the end preparation state and the instruction information “10” is displayed on the instruction display 16 as in FIG. 21A. . However, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (c), it is assumed that the stop operation is performed at the first right stop. As described above, the instruction information “10” indicates that the stop operation should be performed at either the left first stop or the middle first stop. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 21C, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed ignoring the instructed stop operation order. As shown in FIG. 21C, when the first right stop operation is performed in the game in which the instruction information “10” is displayed, the operation error information “−−” is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the case where the instruction information "11" (instructions for left first stop and right first stop) is displayed and the middle first stop operation is performed, the operation error information is immediately after that. Is displayed on the instruction display 16. In addition, in the case where the instruction information “12” (indicating middle first stop and right first stop) is displayed and the left first stop operation is performed, immediately after that, the operation error information indicates the indication indicator Displayed at 16.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the instruction indicator 16 displays instruction information “10” instructing the left first stop and the middle first stop, the stop operation is performed at the left first stop or the middle first stop. If it is, the display of the instruction information "10" is continued, and when the stop operation is performed at the first right stop, the display is switched from the instruction information "10" to the operation error information. In addition, in the game in which the instruction display 16 displays instruction information “11” instructing the left first stop and the right first stop, the instruction information “16” is displayed when the stop operation is performed at the left first stop or the right first stop. If the display of 11 ”is continued and the stop operation is performed at the first stop during the middle, the display is switched from the instruction information“ 11 ”to the operation error information. Furthermore, in the game in which the instruction display 16 displays instruction information "12" instructing the middle first stop and the right first stop, when the stop operation is performed at the middle first stop or the right first stop, the instruction information " When the display of 12 "is continued and the stop operation is performed at the left first stop, the display is switched from the instruction information" 12 "to the operation error information. That is, according to the present embodiment, in the game in which the instruction information for instructing the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is displayed, when the stop operation is performed in the third stop operation mode, the instruction information Switch to other information. In the above configuration, the instruction display 16 notifies the player of an operation error.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining commands (first command, second command) transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412. The main CPU 301 transmits various commands including the first command and the second command to the sub CPU 412 in a period from the time of the game start operation to the time when the stop operation becomes possible. The sub CPU 412 determines various effects (instruction effects described later, navigation effects, and the like) according to a command from the main CPU 301.

  By the way, conventionally, there has been known a configuration (hereinafter referred to as “prior art”) in which the sub CPU determines whether to notify the player of a stop operation mode (for example, correct pressing order of winning combinations) advantageous to the player. In the above-described prior art, the main CPU transmits to the sub CPU a command capable of identifying the stop operation mode advantageous to the player regardless of the gaming state. In the AT state, the sub CPU reports an advantageous stop operation mode identified by a command from the main CPU. On the other hand, in the normal state, the sub CPU does not notify the stop operation mode even if an advantageous stop operation mode can be identified by a command from the main CPU. That is, in the above prior art, the dropout rate is controlled by the sub CPU.

  However, in the prior art, among the main control board having the main CPU and the sub control board having the sub CPU, there has been a case where there is a problem that the sub-control board is replaced with an illegal board. With the above-mentioned fraudulent board, for example, in a game in a normal state, it is possible to analyze a command from the main CPU and illegally notify an advantageous stop operation mode identified from the command. In the above case, the probability that an advantageous stop operation mode is notified is higher than in the case where the game is played with the appropriate sub control board. That is, according to the above-described fraudulent substrate, the payout rate is fraudulently improved.

  In consideration of the above-described circumstances, in the present embodiment, even if the sub control substrate 400 is replaced with a illegitimate substrate, it is difficult to improve the payout rate illegitimately. Specifically, in a normal state in which the correct pressing order of each winning combination (batting order replay, batting order bell) is not notified, from the commands (first command, second command) transmitted by the main CPU 301, the correct pressing The order can not be identified. According to the above configuration, in the normal state, the injustice in which the notification of the correct pressing order of the winning combination is executed by the unauthorized board is suppressed. Hereinafter, the first command and the second command transmitted from the main CPU 301 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the main CPU 301 transmits the first commands “A00” to “A13” to the sub CPU 412 in accordance with the winning area. For example, when the winning area of the current game is a loss, the main CPU 301 transmits a command “A00” to the sub CPU 412. Further, when the batting order replay (X1 to X6, Y1 to Y3) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A01", and when the BAR replay is won, transmits the command "A02", and the normal replay is won. If so, send the command "A03". Similarly, when a batting bell (L1 to L4, C1 to C4, R1 to R4) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits a command "A04", and when a common bell is won, transmits a command "A05", When the watermelon is won, the command "A06" is sent, and when the weak cherry is won, the command "A07" is sent. When the strong cherry is won, the command "A08" is sent, and the weak chance is won In the case, the command "A09" is sent, and if the strong chance is won, the command "A10" is sent, and if the small role ALL is won, the command "A11" is sent, and the duplicate bonus is won, the command When "A12" is transmitted and the single bonus is won, the command "A13" is transmitted.

  According to the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 may be able to identify the winning area of the current game from the first command. Therefore, the sub CPU 412 can determine the effect according to the winning area by the first command. For example, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A05” (common bell), the sub CPU 412 can determine a bell navigation effect for notifying that the common bell has been won. Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A06”, it can determine the watermelon navigation effect for notifying of the winning of the watermelon.

  However, as shown in FIG. 22, the first command when any of batting order replay X1 to batting order replay X6 or batting order replay Y1 to batting order replay Y3 is won is common to the command “A01”. In the above configuration, when the command “A01” is received, the sub CPU 412 can identify that any of batting order replays has been won among all the winning areas, but the type of batting order replays won (winning area number Can not identify).

  As described above, when the batting replay X is won, the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay corresponds to the type of the batting replay X. Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is not possible to identify the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay in the current game from the first command. Further, as described above, when the batting order replay Y is won, the correct pushing order of the RT3 transition replay corresponds to the kind of the batting order replay Y. Therefore, from the first command, it is not possible to identify the correct pushing order of the RT3 transition replay in the current game.

  As shown in FIG. 22, when the batting order bell L (1 to 4), the batting order bell C (1 to 4) or the batting order bell R (1 to 4) is won, the first command is common to the command "A04". is there. In the above configuration, the type of batting bell (L, C, R) can not be identified from the first command. Further, as described above, when the batting bell is won, the correct pushing order of the middle bell corresponds to the type of the batting bell. Therefore, it is impossible to identify the correct pushing order of the middle bell in the current game from the first command.

  As described above, the correct order for the RT2 transition replay when the batting replay X is won, the correct order for the RT3 transition replay when the batting replay Y is won, and the middle bell for the batting bell when the batting bell is won The order can not be identified from the first command. That is, in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is stated that the advantageous stop operation order (stop operation order for improving the payout rate) when the batting replay or the batting bell is won can not be identified from the first command.

  In addition to the above-described first command, the main CPU 301 transmits, to the sub CPU 412, a second command (B01 to B12, B99) corresponding to the instruction number (instruction information) of the current game. As described above, the instruction numbers determined in each game correspond to the correct pressing order of the winning combination in the game. Therefore, the correct pushing order of each winning combination (RT2 transition replay, RT3 transition replay, middle bell) may be identified from the above second command.

  Specifically, when the instruction number "99" (no instruction) is determined in the current game, the main CPU 301 transmits a command "B99" to the sub CPU 412 as shown in FIG. As described above, the instruction number "99" is determined in each game in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, the command "B99" is transmitted in each game. The instruction number "99" is determined when a winning area (such as a lost) other than batting order replay (X, Y) and batting order bell (L, C, R) is won in the AT state or start preparation state. . Furthermore, the instruction number "99" is determined when a winning area other than the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state. When the instruction number "99" (no instruction) is determined in the current game, the second command may not be transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 22, when the main CPU 301 determines that the batting order replay X1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, and determines the instruction number "01" (the order of the left middle, the right) (see FIG. 18B). ), Send the command "B01". When the batting order replay X2 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state and the instruction number "02" (the order in the left and right) is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B02" and the batting order replay X3 If the player wins and determines the instruction number "03" (middle left / right order), the command "B03" is transmitted, the batting order replay X4 is won, and the instruction number "04" (middle right left order) is determined, When the command "B04" is transmitted, the batting order replay X5 is won, and the instruction number "05" (order in the right and left) is determined, the command "B05" is transmitted, the batting order replay X6 is won, and the designation number "06 ("Order from the right middle left"), the command "B06" is transmitted. Further, when the batting order replay Y1 or batting order bell L (1 to 4) is won in the at-AT state or the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the command number "07" (first stop on the left). Is sent to the sub CPU 412. Similarly, when the batting order replay Y2 or batting order bell C (1 to 4) is won in the AT state or start preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the command number "08" (middle first stop), the command " When the batting order replay Y3 or the batting order bell R (1 to 4) is won and the instruction number "09" (first right stop) is determined, the command "B09" is transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the main CPU 301 is in the case where the batting order bell L is won in the end preparation state, and the instruction number "10" (first left stop or middle first stop) is determined (FIG. 19). See) and send the command "B10". On the other hand, when the batting bell L is won and the instruction number “11” (left first stop or right first stop) is determined, the command “B11” is transmitted. Further, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “B10” when the batting bell C is won in the end preparation state and the instruction number “10” is determined. On the other hand, when the batting order bell C is won and the instruction number “12” (middle first stop or right first stop) is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “B12”. Further, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “B11” when the batting bell R is won in the end preparation state and the instruction number “11” is determined. On the other hand, when the batting bell R is won and the instruction number “12” is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “B12”.

  Although described later in detail, when the above second command is received, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect according to the second command. The instruction effect is executed by, for example, the liquid crystal display device 30, and the stop operation order of the instruction number specified by the second command is instructed. In the present embodiment, a combination of a first command “AXX” (X is an integer of 9 or less) and a second command “BYY” (Y is an integer of 9 or less) transmitted in the current game is a transmission pattern “ It may be described as "AXX, BYY".

  As described above, it is not possible to specify the correct order of batting replay and batting bell from the first command. Further, in the normal state, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B99" (without instruction) as a second command in all the winning areas. In the above configuration, the transmission pattern (a combination of the first command and the second command) is obtained even when any batting order replay of batting order replay X1 to batting order replay X6 or batting order replay Y1 to batting order replay Y3 is won in the normal state. Is common to “A01, B99”. In addition, in the normal state, even when any batting bell of batting bell L, batting bell C or batting bell R is won, the transmission pattern is common to “A04, B99”. Therefore, in the normal state, it is not possible to identify the correct pushing order of the batting replay and the batting bell from the first command and the second command. On the other hand, since the second command is different for each type of batting replay, the transmission pattern when the batting replay is won in the AT state is different for each type of batting replay. Further, since the second command is different for each type of batting bell, the transmission pattern when the batting bell is won in the AT state is different for each type of batting bell. Therefore, in the AT state, it is possible to identify the correct pushing order of the batting order replay and the batting bell from the command (second command) transmitted from the main CPU 301.

  According to the present embodiment, in the normal state, the main CPU 301 does not transmit a command that can identify the correct pressing order of the winning combination. Therefore, even if the sub control board 400 is replaced with an illegal board, if the main CPU 301 is in the normal state, the illegal board can not identify the correct pressing order of the winning combination from the command of the main CPU 301. According to the above configuration, a fraudulent act of illegally improving the payout rate due to a fraudulent substrate is suppressed. Further, in the AT state, the main CPU 301 transmits a command capable of identifying the correct pressing order of the winning combination. Therefore, in the AT state, the sub CPU 412 can determine an instruction effect for instructing the correct pressing order of the winning combination. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the AT state, the sub CPU 412 can determine the effect for instructing the correct pressing order, and can suppress the above-described fraudulent act of illegally improving the payout rate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the type (winning area number) of the batting order replay and the batting order bell can not be identified from the first command. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, one of BAR replay, normal replay, common bell, watermelon, weak cherries, strong cherries, weak chance eyes, strong chance eyes, double bonus, and single bonus winning areas are respectively selected. When it is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits first commands “A02”, “A03”, “A05” to “A13” which can identify the selected winning area. In the present embodiment, the winning area that can be identified from the first command may be referred to as a “non-group winning area”.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 14 described above, the stop operation position where each winning combination can be drawn to the valid line is defined for each non-group winning area. Therefore, when the type of the non-group winning area (winning number) is notified (for example, a notification of winning a watermelon or a notification of winning a strong chance), the player is determined to have a winning combination (for example, a watermelon combination or one winning combination B). It can identify the stop operation position where it can pull in.

  In the above configuration, it is conceivable that the first command is analyzed by the illegal board, the type of the non-group winning area is notified, and the fraud rate is made to be unfairly high. In consideration of the above-described circumstances, in the present embodiment, even if the type of the non-group winning area is reported incorrectly, the influence on the payout rate is limited. Specifically, each winning area having a relatively small influence of the winning notification on the payout rate is adopted as each non-group winning area. Hereinafter, the influence of each winning notification of each non-group winning area on the payout rate will be described.

  As described above, when the watermelon is won, the watermelon part can be stopped and displayed on the activated line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, the watermelon combination stops the left reel 12L at the symbol positions "9" to "13" or at the symbol positions "16" to "20", and the middle reel 12C is moved to the symbol position " The stop operation is performed on the effective line when the stop operation is performed at 9 "to" 13 "and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol positions" 19 "" 20 "" 0 "to" 2 ". It is dropped when 12 is stopped. In the above configuration, in the game in which the watermelon is won, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the watermelon combination can be drawn in, the withdrawal rate is improved as compared with the case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the watermelon combination is dropped. Therefore, when the notification of the winning of the watermelon is given, the withdrawal rate can be improved by performing the stop operation in the stop operation mode in which the watermelon combination can be drawn into the effective line. In the above configuration, when the notification of winning a watermelon is made fraudulent, the payout rate may be unfairly high.

  However, as described above with reference to FIG. 15, the player usually performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode (the so-called small combination recovery hit method, DDT hit method, KKK hit method, etc.). Specifically, the left reel 12L is stopped at symbol position "9" or symbol position "10", the middle reel 12C is stopped at symbol positions "9" to "13", and the right reel 12R is symbol position " 19 "20" "0" to "2" to stop operation. As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. That is, in the game in which the watermelon is won, when the stop operation is performed in the normal procedure (specific operation mode), the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the presence or absence of the notification of the watermelon win.

  As understood from the above description, on the premise of playing a game in the specific operation mode, there is no difference in the payout rate between the case where the watermelon is notified and the case where the notification is not given. Therefore, even if the notification of winning a watermelon is made illegal, there is no effect (small) on the actual payout rate.

  As described above, when the weak cherry is won, the corner cherry can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, the corner cherry is stopped and displayed on the effective line when the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “7” to “11”, and the left reel 12L is displayed at other symbol positions. Drop it when it is stopped. In the above configuration, in the game where the weak cherry has won, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the corner cherry can be pulled in, the withdrawal rate improves compared to the case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the corner cherry is dropped . Therefore, when the notification of winning the weak cherry is given, the withdrawal rate can be improved by performing the stop operation in the stop operation mode in which the square cherry can be drawn into the effective line. In the above configuration, when the notification of winning the weak cherry is made illegal, there is a possibility that the payout rate will be unfairly high.

  However, as described above with reference to FIG. 15, in the game in which the weak cherry is won, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, the corner cherry is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the presence or absence of the weak cherry election notification. Ru. Therefore, even if the notification of winning the weak cherry is made illegal, there is no effect (small) on the actual payout rate.

  As described above, when the strong cherry is won, the middle row cherry can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, when the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “6” to “10”, the middle row cherries are stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the left reel 12L is displayed at other symbol positions. Drop it when it is stopped. In the above configuration, in the game where the strong cherries are won, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the middle row cherries can be pulled in, the withdrawal rate is improved as compared with the case where the stop operation is performed . Therefore, when the notification of the winning of the strong cherry is given, the withdrawal rate can be improved by performing the stop operation in the stop operation mode in which the middle row cherry can be drawn into the effective line. In the above configuration, when the notification of winning strong cherry is made fraudulent, the payout rate may be unfairly high.

  However, as described above with reference to FIG. 15, in the game in which the strong cherry has won, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, the middle cherry is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the presence notification of the strong cherry. Ru. Therefore, even if the notification of winning strong cherries is made fraudulent, there is no effect (small) on the actual payout rate.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 14, in the game in which the common bell is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation mode. That is, in the game in which the common bell is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the presence or absence of the notification of the common bell. Therefore, even if the notification of winning the common bell is made fraudulent, there is no effect (small) on the actual payout rate.

  As described above, when the weak chance is won, the one-sheet combination A can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, the one-piece winning combination A stops the left reel 12L at the symbol positions "3" to "7", and the middle reel 12C at the symbol positions "1" to "5" or When the stop operation is performed at positions “14” to “18” and the right reel 12R is stopped at symbol positions “18” to “20” “0” “1”, the stop display is displayed on the effective line, and at other symbol positions When each reel 12 is stopped, it is dropped. In the above configuration, in the game where the weak chance is won, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the one-piece combination A can be pulled in, it is better than the case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the one-piece combination A is dropped The ball rate improves. Therefore, when the notification of the winning of the weak chance is given, it is possible to improve the payout rate by performing the stop operation in the stop operation mode in which the one-piece winning combination A can be drawn into the effective line.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 15, the one-player combination A is dropped when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, unlike the watermelon combination or the cherry combination. In the above configuration, in the game in which the weak chance eye is notified of winning, the payout rate is improved by performing the stop operation at the stop operation position where the single-piece winning combination A can be drawn in, compared to the case of performing the stop operation Do. That is, when the winning of the weak chance is informed of fraudulently, the payout rate may be unfairly high.

  However, the number of payouts for one winning combination A in the present embodiment is equal to or less than the prescribed number (3) for starting a game. Specifically, the number of payouts for one winning combination A is one (minimum of the number of payouts). Therefore, even if one piece A is stopped and displayed on the activated line due to an incorrect notification, it is impossible to acquire medals larger than the number of medals (three) required to start the game. In the above configuration, for example, as compared with the configuration in which the number of payouts per one winning combination A is larger than the prescribed number (for example, 15), the influence on the payout rate in the case where the notification of winning the weak chance eye is made illegal It can be made smaller.

  As described above, when the strong chance is won, the one-sheet combination B can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, the one-piece winning combination B stops the left reel 12L at the symbol positions "3" to "7", and the middle reel 12C at the symbol positions "1" to "5" or When the stop operation is performed at positions “14” to “18” and the right reel 12R is stopped at symbol positions “5” to “9” “13” to “17”, the stop display is displayed on the effective line, and other symbol positions And each reel 12 is dropped when it is operated to stop. In the above configuration, in the game in which the strong chance is won, if the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the first combination B can be pulled in, it is more effective than the case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the one combination B is dropped The ball rate improves. Therefore, when the notification of the winning of the strong chance eye is given, the withdrawal rate can be improved by performing the stop operation in the stop operation mode in which the one-piece winning combination B can be drawn into the effective line.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 15, the single-player combination B is dropped when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, similarly to the single-player combination A. In the above configuration, in the game in which the winning notification of the strong chance eye is notified, the payout rate is improved by performing the stop operation at the stop operation position where the one-piece combination B can be drawn in, compared to the case where the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode. Do. That is, when the winning of the strong chance is notified in an unfair manner, the payout rate may be unfairly high.

  However, the number of payouts for one winning combination B in this embodiment is, like the single winning combination A, equal to or less than the specified number (3) for starting a game. Specifically, the number of payouts for one winning combination B is one. In the above configuration, for example, compared with a configuration in which the number of paid-out pieces for one sheet B is larger than the specified number, it is possible to reduce the influence on the payout rate when the winning notification of the strong chance eye is made illegal.

  As described above, when the single bonus is won, the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed on the activated line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, the bonus combination stops the left reel 12L at the symbol positions "1" to "5", and the middle reel 12C at the symbol positions "1" to "5" or the symbol position " When the stop operation is performed at 14 "to" 18 "and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol positions" 6 "to" 10 ", the stop display is displayed on the effective line, and the respective reels 12 are stopped at other symbol positions In case That is, the bonus combination is dropped in the specific operation mode as in the single-piece combination B, for example (see FIG. 15).

  However, when the bonus combination is dropped in the winning game, the winning state is carried over in the next and subsequent games. That is, even when the bonus combination is missed in the winning game, the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the next and subsequent games. In the above configuration, the difference in the payout rate is relatively small between the case where the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line and the case where the stop combination is not displayed. Therefore, the effect on the payout rate when the notification of winning of the single bonus is invalidated is small.

  As described above, when the duplicate bonus is won, the bonus combination and the watermelon combination can be stopped and displayed on the activated line. The bonus role carries over the winning state in the game after the duplicate bonus is won. Further, the number of payouts of the watermelon combination is five, which is larger than the prescribed number (three) required to start the next game. Therefore, in the game in which the overlapping bonus is won, the payout rate becomes highest when the stop operation is performed at the symbol position where the watermelon combination can be drawn. That is, when the notification of winning of the duplicate bonus is received, the payout rate can be improved by performing the stop operation in the stop operation mode in which the watermelon combination can be drawn into the effective line.

  In the above configuration, if the notification of winning of the duplicate bonus is made fraudulent, there is a possibility that the payout rate will be unfairly high. However, as described above, the watermelon combination of this embodiment is stopped and displayed on the effective line when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode (normal procedure). That is, on the premise of playing a game in the specific operation mode, the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the presence or absence of the notification of winning of the duplicate bonus. Therefore, even if the notification of winning of the duplicate bonus is made illegal, there is no effect (small) on the actual payout rate.

  As described above, when the BAR replay is won, the BAR replay or the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the activated line according to the stop operation mode (see FIG. 12). For example, when the winning notification of the batting replay X1 is given, the player recognizes the correct pushing order “left middle right” of the RT2 transition replay, so that the winning notification affects the payout rate. However, BAR replay is not an RT transition symbol (see FIG. 16). Further, in the game in which BAR replay is won, regardless of the stop operation mode, BAR replay or normal replay is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the right to replay is granted (replay does not occur). As described above, when the BAR replay is won, the payout rate does not change according to the stop operation mode. Therefore, even if the notification of winning the BAR replay is made illegal, the payout rate is not improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the type (winning area number) of the winning area is not identified from the first command for the winning area (batting order replay, batting order bell) having a large influence on the payout rate by the winning notification. did. On the other hand, with regard to a winning area (non-group winning area) having a small influence of the winning notification on the payout rate, the type of the winning area can be identified from the first command. According to the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 can execute various effects according to the type of the non-group winning area while suppressing the fraudulent act of increasing the payout rate by the above-described incorrect notification. That is, it is possible to diversify the rendition while suppressing cheating.

   Fig.23 (a) and FIG.23 (b) are conceptual diagrams of each rotating drum effect determination table (A, B). The main CPU 301 determines whether or not to execute each rotating drum effect in the rotating drum effect determination process. In the spinning drum effect, the main CPU 301 varies the reels 12 in a predetermined manner. Each spinning drum effect includes a spinning drum effect A, a spinning drum effect B, a spinning drum effect C, and a spinning drum effect D, and the aspect of each reel 12 is different for each spinning drum effect. In addition, the aspect of each reel 12 in each spinning drum effect can be set suitably. Moreover, the aspect of each reel 12 in each spinning drum effect may be mutually the same.

  Each rotating drum effect determination table is configured to include a rotating drum effect determination table A shown in FIG. 23 (a) and a rotating drum effect determination table B shown in FIG. 23 (b). The main CPU 301 determines the rotating drum effect using the rotating drum effect determination table A in each game in the normal state and the end preparation state. Further, the main CPU 301 determines a rotating drum effect using the rotating drum effect determination table B in each of the AT-in-operation state and the start preparation state game.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), each turn drum effect determination table is configured to include each lottery value for each winning area. In addition, each lottery value includes a lottery value of “no effect”, a lottery value of rotating drum effect A, a lottery value of rotating drum effect B, a lottery value of rotating drum effect C, and a lottery value of rotating drum effect D There is. Each lottery value is in the order of "no effect" to rotating drum effect D in the rotating drum effect determination process (no effect → rotating drum effect A → rotating drum effect B → rotating drum effect C → rotating drum effect D in order) It is subtracted to the random value R2 (0 to 255). The main CPU 301 determines a rotating drum effect of a lottery value in which the subtraction result is a negative number. For example, in the normal state, it is assumed that the common bell is won and the random number R2 is the numerical value "240". When the common bell is won in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 23A, the lottery value “244” of “no effect” is subtracted to the random value R2. Since the result (240-244 = -4) obtained by subtracting the lottery value from the random number value R2 is a negative number, the main CPU 301 determines not to execute the turning drum effect in the current game. Further, for example, in the normal state, it is assumed that the common bell is won and the random number R2 is the numeric value "245". In the above case, the result (245-244 = 1) obtained by subtracting the lottery value of "no effect" from the random number R2 does not become a negative number, and then subtracts the lottery value "4" of the spinning drum effect A to the subtraction result If you do, it will be a negative number. Therefore, the main CPU 301 determines the spinning drum effect A.

  The main CPU 301 transmits, to the sub CPU 412, an effect type command indicating the turning drum effect determined in each game. Similar to the first command and the second command (see FIG. 22) described above, the effect type command is transmitted in the period from the time of the game start operation to the time when the stop operation is possible. The sub CPU 412 determines an effect in accordance with the effect type command. The transmission time of the effect type command can be changed as appropriate.

  By the way, in the configuration where the effect type command (turning drum effect) is drawn according to the winning area, the type of the winning area (the correct winning order of the winning combination) is the effect type command depending on how to assign the lottery value of each turn drum effect. It may be possible to identify (infer) from In the above case, there is a possibility that the correct pressing order of the batting replay or batting bell may be identified from the effect type command. Hereinafter, a comparison example in which the type of the winning area can be estimated from the effect type command will be described using FIG. 23 (c-1) and FIG. 23 (c-2).

  FIG. 23 (c-1) is a conceptual diagram of a rotating drum effect determination table of a comparative example. The main CPU 301 of the comparative example determines the rotating drum effect using the rotating drum effect determination table in each game in the normal state. The spinning drum effect determination table of the comparative example is configured to include each drawing value of each spinning drum effect as in the case of the respective spinning drum effect determination tables of the present embodiment. In FIG. 23 (c-1), among the lottery values of the respective turning drum effects, lottery values when the batting order bell (L, C, R) is won are extracted and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 23C, in the comparative example, when the batting order bell L is won in the normal state, the lottery value of “no effect” is the numerical value “0”, and the lottery value of the revolving drum effect A is the numerical value “ The lottery value of the rotating drum effect B and the rotating drum effect C is “1”, and the lottery value of the rotating drum effect D is “0”. Therefore, when the batting order bell L is won in the normal state, “no effect” and the turning drum effect D are not determined. When the batting order bell L is won in the normal state, the turning drum effect A is determined with a probability 254/256, the turning drum effect B is determined with a probability 1/256, and the turning drum effect C is determined with a probability 1/256. Be done. That is, when the batting bell L is won, the spinning drum effect A is determined with the highest probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (c-1), in the comparative example, when batting order bell C is won in the normal state, the lottery value of “no effect” is the numerical value “0”, and the lottery value of rotating drum effect B is the The lottery value of the numerical value “254”, the turning drum effect A and the turning drum effect C is a numerical value “1”, and the lottery value of the turning drum effect D is a numerical value “0”. Therefore, when the batting order bell C is won in the normal state, “no effect” and the rotating drum effect D are not determined. When the batting order bell C is won in the normal state, the turning drum effect A is determined with a probability 1/256, the turning drum effect B is determined with a probability 254/256, and the turning drum effect C is determined with a probability 1/256. Be done. That is, when the batting order bell C is won, the spinning drum effect B is determined with the highest probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (c-1), in the comparative example, when the batting order bell R is won in the normal state, the lottery value of “no effect” is the numerical value “0” and the lottery value of the turning drum effect C is The lottery value of the numerical value “254”, the rotating drum effect A and the rotating drum effect B is the numerical value “1”, and the lottery value of the rotating drum effect D is the numerical value “0”. Therefore, when the batting order bell R is won in the normal state, “no effect” and the rotating drum effect D are not determined. When the batting order bell C is won in the normal state, the turning drum effect A is determined with a probability 1/256, the turning drum effect B is determined with a probability 1/256, and the turning drum effect C is determined with a probability 254/256. Be done. That is, when the batting bell R is won, the spinning drum effect C is determined with the highest probability.

  As described above, the probability of winning the batting bell L, the probability of winning the batting bell C, and the probability of winning the batting bell R are equal to each other (see FIG. 9). Therefore, in the above comparative example, when the spinning drum effect A is determined, the probability that the batting bell L is won is higher than the probability that the batting bell C or the batting bell R is won. Also, when the spinning drum effect B is determined, the probability that the batting order bell C is won is higher than the probability that the batting order bell L or the batting order bell R is won. Similarly, when the spinning drum effect C is determined, the probability that the batting order bell R is won is higher than the probability that the batting order bell L or the batting order bell C is won.

  In the above comparative example, the first command, the second command, and the effect type command are transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412 as in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, a combination of the first command, the second command, and the effect type command transmitted by the main CPU 301 is referred to as a transmission pattern “AXX, BYY, effects A to D or“ no effect ”” (X and Y are integers of 9 or more). May be described. For example, it is assumed that the main CPU 301 transmits a first command “A04” indicating a batting bell, a second command “B99” (see FIG. 22) indicating “no instruction”, and an effect type command indicating a rotating drum effect A. Suppose. In the above case, the transmission pattern is expressed as “A04, B99, effect A”.

  FIG. 23C-2 is a diagram for explaining a transmission pattern when the batting bell (L, C, R) is won in the normal state in the comparative example. As shown in FIG. 23 (c-2), the first command is commonly “A04” in the case where the batting bell L is won, the batting bell C is won, and the batting bell R is won. In the normal state, the second command is "B99" regardless of the winning area. Further, as described above, when the batting bell is won, the spinning drum effect A, the spinning drum effect B or the spinning drum effect C is determined, and the production type command is "effect A", "effect B" or "effect C" become. Therefore, the transmission pattern when the batting order bell is won in the normal state is “A04, B99, effect A” or “A04, B99, effect B” or “A04, B99, effect C” shown in FIG. It becomes ".

  In the comparison example, as described above, when the spinning drum effect A is determined, the probability that the batting bell L is won is higher than the probability that the other batting bells (C, R) are won. Therefore, in the comparative example, when each command is transmitted in the transmission pattern “A04, B99, effect A”, it is possible to identify from each command that the probability that the batting bell L is won is the highest. Similarly, when the effect B is determined, the probability that the batting bell C is won is higher than the probability that another batting bell is won. Therefore, when each command is transmitted in the transmission pattern “A04, B99, effect B”, it can be identified from each command that the probability that the batting bell C is won is the highest. Similarly, when the effect C is determined, the probability that the batting bell R is won is higher than the probability that another batting bell is won. Therefore, when each command is transmitted in the transmission pattern “A04, B99, effect C”, it can be identified from each command that the probability that the batting bell R is won is the highest.

  In the above comparative example, even if the second command indicates "no instruction", the type of the batting order bell which has been won can be estimated by the command from the main CPU 301. Therefore, in the above comparative example, it is possible to replace the sub-control board 400 with an illegal board, cause the illegal board to analyze the effect type command, and notify the correct push order of the batting bell. In consideration of the above circumstances, the revolving drum effect determination table A of the present embodiment is configured such that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to guess the correct pressing order of each winning area from the effect type command.

  Description will be returned to FIG. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), in the rotary drum effect determination table A of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned pairs are common in that each lottery value of each rotary drum effect is common to each bat order bell (L, C, R). It differs from the proportional rotating drum effect determination table. Specifically, when the batting bell L is elected, the lottery value of "no effect" is the value "244", the lottery value of the rotating drum effect A is the value "10", and the rotating drum effect B and the rotating drum The lottery value of the effect C is the numerical value "1", and the lottery value of the turning drum effect D is the numerical value "0". Further, as understood from FIG. 23A, each lottery value of each turning drum effect when the batting order bell C is won is the same as when the batting order bell L is won. Furthermore, each lottery value of each turn drum effect when the batting bell R is won is the same as when the batting bell L or the batting bell C is won. That is, when any batting bell is won, "no effect" is determined with probability 244/256 regardless of the type of the batting bell, rotating drum effect A is determined with probability 10/256, and rotating drum effect B is determined with probability 1/256, rotating drum effect C is determined with probability 1/256, and rotating drum effect D is not determined. That is, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the effect type command indicating “no effect” is transmitted with the same probability regardless of the type of batting bell that has been won. Similarly, each of the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect A, the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect B, and the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect C is transmitted with the same probability regardless of the type of bat order bell that has been won Be done. In addition, the effect type command indicating the spinning drum effect D is not transmitted regardless of the type of batting order bell that has been won.

  In the above configuration, the probability that each command is transmitted from the main CPU 301 with the first command, the second command, and the effect type command as the transmission pattern “A04, B99, no effect” does not depend on the type of batting bell that has been won Become equal. Similarly, the probability of being transmitted by the transmission pattern "A04, B99, effect A", the probability of being transmitted by the transmission pattern "A04, B99, effect B", and the transmission pattern of "A04, B99, effect C" Probability is equal regardless of the type of batting bell won. Therefore, the type of batting bell can not be identified (estimated) from the transmission pattern of each command. That is, in the present embodiment, it is not possible to identify the correct pressing order of the middle bell from each command including the effect type command.

  Further, in this embodiment, as understood from FIG. 23A, even when any batting order replay X from batting order replay X1 to batting order replay X6 is won, “no effect” has a probability of 1 (256/256). It is determined. That is, regardless of the type of batting order replay X (1 to 6) won, each command is transmitted from the main CPU 301 with the transmission pattern "A01, B99, no effect". Therefore, the type of the batting replay X can not be identified from the transmission pattern when the batting replay X is won. That is, in this embodiment, it is not possible to identify the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay from each command including the effect type command.

  Further, in this embodiment, as understood from FIG. 23A, “no effect” is determined with probability 1 even when any batting order replay Y from batting order replay Y1 to batting order replay Y3 is won. That is, regardless of the type of batting order replay Y (1 to 3) that has been won, each command is transmitted from the main CPU 301 with the transmission pattern “A01, B99, no effect”. Therefore, the type of batting order replay Y can not be identified from the transmission pattern when batting order replay Y is won. That is, in this embodiment, it is not possible to identify the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay from each command including the effect type command.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is not possible to identify the correct pressing order of each winning combination (middle bell, RT2 transition replay, RT3 transition replay) from each command including the effect type command. Therefore, even when the effect type command is analyzed by the illegal board, it is not possible to identify an advantageous stop operation order for improving the payout rate. According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using the above-described fraudulent substrate.

  By the way, when the probability that each turn drum effect is executed is the same for each bat order bell, some players may feel that the turn drum effect lacks interest. In consideration of the above-described circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the AT state, the probability that each turning drum effect is executed is made different for each batting bell.

  FIG. 23 (b) is a conceptual view of the rotating drum effect determination table B. The main CPU 301 of the present embodiment determines the rotating drum effect using the rotating drum effect determination table B in each of the AT-in-operation state and the start preparation state game. As understood from FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), each lottery value of each winning area (common bell, etc.) other than batting bell (L, C, R) is rotated with rotating drum effect determination table A. It is equal at the body effect determination table B. Therefore, the probability that each turning drum effect is determined when a winning area other than the batting bell is won is equal between the normal state and the AT state. Note that the probability that each turning drum effect is determined when a winning area other than the batting bell is won may be different between the normal state and the AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), when the batting bell L is won in the AT state or in the start preparation state, the lottery for "no effect" is performed as in the case where the batting bell L is won in the normal state or the end preparation state. The value is the numerical value "244", the lottery value of the rotating drum effect A is the numerical value "10", the lottery value of the rotating drum effect B and the rotating drum effect C is the numerical value "1", the lottery of the rotating drum effect D The value is the numerical value "0". On the other hand, if the batting order bell C is won in the AT state or in the start preparation state, the lottery value of "no effect" is the numerical value "244", and the lottery value of the turning drum effect B is the numerical value "10", The lottery values of the spinning drum effect A and the spinning drum effect C are the numerical value “1”, and the lottery value of the spinning drum effect D is the numerical value “0”. That is, when the batting bell C is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the probability of winning the turning drum effect A is lower than when the batting bell C is won in the normal state or the end preparation state. The probability of winning is high. When the batting bell R is won in the AT state or in the start preparation state, the lottery value of "no effect" is the numerical value "244", and the lottery value of the turning drum effect C is the numerical value "10". The lottery values of the torso effect A and the torso effect B are the numerical value "1", and the lottery values of the torso effect D are the numerical value "0". That is, when the batting bell R is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the probability of winning the turning drum effect A is lower than when the batting bell R is won in the normal state or the end preparation state. The probability of winning is high.

  As described above, the probability of winning each turn drum effect when the batting bell is won is the same regardless of the type of batting bell in the normal state or the end preparation state, but in the AT state or the start preparation state, It depends on the type of batting bell. Therefore, for example, in the AT state or the start preparation state, the fun of the turning drum effect is improved as compared with the configuration in which the winning probability of each turning drum effect is the same regardless of the batting bell type.

  In the present embodiment, when the batting bell L is won in the AT state or in the start preparation state, the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect A is a effect type command indicating the turning drum effect B and the turning drum effect C. It is transmitted with a higher probability than the effect type command shown. When the batting order bell C is won, the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect B is transmitted with higher probability than the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect A and the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect C. Furthermore, when batting order bell R is elected, the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect C is transmitted with higher probability than the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect A and the effect type command indicating the turning drum effect B. In the above-described configuration, in the AT in-progress state or the start preparation state, the type of batting bell can be inferred from each command transmitted from the main CPU 301. That is, the correct order of the middle bell can be estimated from each command. However, as described above, the AT state and the start preparation state are originally gaming states in which the correct pressing order of the middle bell is instructed by the instruction information of the instruction display 16. Therefore, even if it is a case where each command from the main CPU 301 is analyzed with an illegal board in the AT state or start preparation state and the correct order of middle bell is informed, it does not become more than the original withdrawal rate .

  FIG. 24 is a conceptual diagram of an AT determination table. The AT determination table is configured to include each lottery value for each winning area. In addition, each lottery value of each winning area is provided according to the turning drum effect, and includes a lottery value of “winning” and a lottery value of “non-winning”. In the AT determination processing of each game, the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value corresponding to the winning area and the spinning drum effect to the random value R3. When the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value of “winning” from the random value R3 and the result is a negative number, the main CPU 301 determines transition to the AT state. According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to shift to the AT state with a probability according to the winning area and the spinning drum effect. For example, it is assumed that the batting order bell is won in the current game and it is decided not to execute the spinning drum effect. In the above case, since the lottery value of “winning” is the numerical value “0”, the AT state is not won. On the other hand, it is assumed that the batting order bell is won in this game and the spinning drum effect A is determined. In the above case, since the lottery value of “winning” is the numerical value “3276”, when the random number value R3 is any of the range “0 to 3275”, the AT state is won. Further, it is assumed that the batting order bell is won in this game and the spinning drum effect B or the spinning drum effect C is determined. In the above case, since the lottery value of “winning” is the numerical value “6553”, the AT state is won with a higher probability than when the spinning drum effect A is won in the game in which the batting bell is won. In FIG. 24, the lottery values for the weak rare and the strong rare are omitted.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the lottery value of “winning” when the BAR replay is won is the numerical value “65536”, and the lottery value of “non-winning” is the numerical value “0”. That is, when the BAR replay is won, it always wins the AT state. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the lottery value in the case where the winning area is other than the batting bell, the common bell, the weak rare role, and the strong rare role (loss, batting replay, normal replay, bonus) is the numerical value “0”. In the example shown in FIG. 24, when the BAR replay is won, the AT is always elected. However, when the BAR replay is won, the AT state may not be won. In addition, it may be configured to be able to win the AT state when winning areas other than the winning bell, the common bell, the weak rare role, and the hard rare role are won. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the lottery value of the weak rare player (watermelon, weak cherry, weak chance eyes) is made common, but the watermelon lottery value, weak cherry lottery value and weak chance eye lottery values You may provide separately. Similarly, the lottery value of the strong cherry and the lottery value of the strong chance eye may be provided separately. Further, a plurality of AT determination tables may be provided. For example, an AT determination table used in the normal state and an AT determination table used in the AT state may be provided.

  The main RAM 303 stores a display permission bit storage area indicating a combination of symbols permitted to be stopped on the activated line, a display setting value storage area storing numerical values displayed on the setting display unit 36, and a setting value Setting value storage area, random number value R1 storage area where random number value R1 is stored, random number value R2 storage area where random number value R2 is stored, random number value R3 storage area where random number value R3 is stored, sent to sub control board 400 Command storage area for storing commands, lamp related data storage area for storing data indicating the display mode of various lamps, a winning area storage area for storing a winning area, and the number of stop buttons 25 for which the stop operation has not been performed A storage area including a stop order storage area for storing the operation order of the unstopped operation counter and each stop button 25 is provided.

<Each data used by the sub CPU>
Hereinafter, various data stored in the sub ROM 413 will be described using the drawings. The sub ROM 413 stores various data including an instruction effect determination table shown in FIGS. 25 and 27 and an effect lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a conceptual view of an instruction effect determination table (A, B). When the sub-CPU 412 receives the second command indicating the instruction number (instruction information), the sub CPU 412 determines any of the instruction effects (A, B, C, D, E) based on the instruction effect determination table. When the instruction effect is determined, the sub CPU 412 transmits an effect command indicating the instruction effect to the image control board (image control CPU 421) 420. When the image control CPU 421 receives an effect command indicating an instruction effect, the image control CPU 421 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display each image of the instruction effect. In this embodiment, when the sub control board (sub CPU 412) receives the second command, the notification of the stop operation mode (stop operation order) corresponding to the second command is always executed by the sub CPU 412.

  FIG. 25 (a) is a conceptual view of an instruction effect determination table A. FIG. When the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A01” (striking order replay X or batting order replay Y) as the first command and receives any of the commands “B01” to “B09” as the second command, the instruction The instruction effect is determined by the effect determination table A. As described above, the commands “B01” to “B09” are transmitted in the in-AT state or the start preparation state of the main CPU 301, and are not transmitted in the normal state and the end preparation state. That is, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect according to the instruction effect determination table A in a game in which the main CPU 301 is in the AT state or in the start preparation state.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), when the command "A01" is received, the sub CPU 412 determines either of each instruction effect A (1 to 6) or each instruction effect B (1 to 3). Specifically, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A01” as the first command and receives the command “B01” as the second command, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect A1. Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command "A01" as the first command and receives the command "B02" as the second command, it determines the instruction effect A2, and receives the command "B03". When the instruction effect A3 is determined and the command "B04" is received, the instruction effect A4 is determined. When the command "B05" is received, the instruction effect A5 is determined, and when the command "B06" is received, the instruction Determine the effect A6.

  In the above configuration, when the batting order replay X is won and the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “01”, the main CPU 301 displays instruction information “1” on the instruction display 16 and the sub CPU 412 instructs The effect A1 is determined. When the batting order replay X is won and the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "02", the main CPU 301 displays instruction information "2" on the instruction display 16, and the sub CPU 412 displays the instruction effect A2 It is determined. Similarly, when the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "03", the main CPU 301 displays instruction information "3" on the instruction display 16, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect A3, and the main CPU 301 selects the instruction number "04". When the main CPU 301 displays instruction information "4" on the instruction display 16, the sub CPU 412 determines instruction effect A4, and when the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "05", the main CPU 301 instructs When the information "5" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the instruction effect A5 is determined by the sub CPU 412, and the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "06", the instruction information "6" is displayed on the instruction display 16 by the main CPU 301. It is displayed, and the instruction effect A6 is determined by the sub CPU 412. As described above, in the liquid crystal display device 30, the instruction effect according to the stop operation mode (order) of the instruction information displayed by the instruction display 16 is determined.

  In the instruction effect A1 of the present embodiment, the stop operation order "left middle right" is indicated. That is, the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information “1” is also instructed in the instruction effect A1. In the instruction effect A2, the stop operation order "right and left" instructed by the instruction information "2" is instructed, and in the instruction effect A3, the stop operation order "middle left and right" instructed by the instruction information "3" In the instruction effect A4, the stop operation order "middle right left" instructed by the instruction information "4" is instructed, and in the instruction effect A5, the stop operation order "right left middle" instructed by the instruction information "5" In the instruction effect A6, the stop operation order "right middle left" instructed by the instruction information "6" is instructed. As described above, the instruction information displayed when the batting replay X is won instructs the correct pushing order of the RT2 transition replay. Therefore, in each instruction effect A (1 to 6), the correct pushing order of the RT2 transition replay is instructed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay is instructed by both the instruction information of the instruction display 16 and the instruction effect A of the liquid crystal display device 30.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A01” as the first command and receives the command “B07” as the second command, it determines the instruction effect B1. Do. Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A01” as the first command and receives the command “B08” as the second command, it determines the instruction effect B2, and receives the command “B09”. The instruction effect B3 is determined.

  In the above configuration, when the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “07”, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “7” on the instruction display 16, and the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B1. When the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “08”, the main CPU 301 displays instruction information “8” on the instruction display 16, and the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B 2. Similarly, when the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "09", the main CPU 301 displays instruction information "9" on the instruction display 16, and the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect B3.

  In the instruction effect B1 of the present embodiment, a left first stop is instructed. That is, the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information “7” is also instructed in the instruction effect B1. Further, in the instruction effect B2, an intermediate first stop instructed by the instruction information "8" is instructed, and in the instruction effect B3, a right first stop instructed by the instruction information "9" is instructed. As described above, the instruction information displayed when the batting order replay Y is won indicates the correct pushing order of the RT3 transition replay. Therefore, in each instruction effect B (1 to 3), the correct pushing order of the RT3 transition replay is instructed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay is instructed by both the instruction information of the instruction display 16 and the instruction effect B of the liquid crystal display device 30.

  FIG. 25 (b) is a conceptual view of an instruction effect determination table B. When the sub CPU 412 receives the command "A04" (strike order bell) as the first command and receives any of the commands "B07" to "B09" as the second command, the instruction effect determination table B is used. The instruction effects (C1 to C3, D1 to D3) are determined. As described above, the commands “B07” to “B09” are transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412 in the AT state and the start preparation state. That is, when the sub CPU 412 wins the batting bell in the AT state or in the start preparation state, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect using the instruction effect determination table B.

  As understood from FIG. 25B, when “A04” is received as the first command, a plurality of types (two types) of instruction effects (C, D) may be selected according to one second command. When the sub CPU 412 receives “A04” as the first command, the sub CPU 412 selects the instruction effect C or the instruction effect D with a predetermined probability.

  Specifically, when the command “A04” is received and the command “B07” is received, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect C1 or the instruction effect D1. The instruction effect C1 and the instruction effect D1 both indicate the correct pushing order (first left stop) of the bat order bell L. Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command "A04" and receives the command "B08", the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect C2 or the instruction effect D2. The instruction effect C2 and the instruction effect D2 both indicate the correct pushing order (medium first stop) of the bat order bell C. Similarly, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command "A04" and receives the command "B09", the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect C3 or an instruction effect D3. The instruction effect C3 and the instruction effect D3 both indicate the correct pushing order (first right stop) of the bat order bell R. In the above configuration, when the batting bell is won, the correct pressing order of the middle bell is instructed by both the instruction information of the instruction display 16 and the instruction effect (C, D) of the liquid crystal display device 30.

  FIG. 25C is a diagram for explaining the probability that the instruction effect C (1 to 3) is determined and the probability that the instruction effect D (1 to 3) is determined in the game in which the batting order bell is won. is there. As shown in FIG. 25 (c), the probability that the instruction effect C is determined and the probability that the instruction effect D is determined depend on whether or not the AT state has been won in the current game. Specifically, when the batting bell is won and the AT state is not won, the instruction effect C is determined with a probability of about 99/100, and the instruction effect D is determined with a probability of about 1/100. . On the other hand, when the batting bell is won and the AT state is won, the instruction effect C is determined with a probability of about 9/10, and the instruction effect D is determined with a probability of about 1/10. For example, it is assumed that the AT state is not won in the game in which "A04" is received as the first command and "B07" is received as the second command. In the above case, the instruction effect C1 is determined with a probability of about 99/100, and the instruction effect D1 is determined with a probability of about 1/100. On the other hand, when the player receives "A04" as the first command and receives "B07" as the second command and wins the AT state, the instruction effect C1 is determined with a probability of about 9/10, and the probability of about 19/10. The instruction effect D1 is determined at 1/10.

  As understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the batting bell is won, the probability that the instruction effect D is determined is higher than that when the AT state is not won (probability about 1/100) If you win the state (probability about 1/10) is higher. According to the above configuration, when the correct order of the middle bell is instructed by the instruction effect D, it is informed that the expectation degree of winning in the AT state is higher than when the instruction effect C is instructed.

  FIG. 26A is a simulated view of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the instruction effect A. FIG. FIG. 26A-1 shows a specific example of the instruction effect A1 when the batting order replay X1 is won. As described above, in the instruction effect A1, the correct pressing order “left middle right” of the RT2 transition replay in the game in which the batting replay X1 is won is instructed. Moreover, the specific example of FIG. 26 (a-1) assumes the case where instruction | indication effect A1 is performed in the start preparation state. In the start preparation state, for example, as shown in FIG. 25A, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays a message “Preparing” that the instruction state is the start preparation state. In the start preparation state, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays the total number of medals acquired in the current AT state.

  In the indication effect A (1 to 6), three indication symbol images SX (1 to 3) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Each instruction icon image SX includes an instruction icon image SX1 for displaying the number "1", an instruction icon image SX2 for displaying the number "2", and an instruction icon SX3 for displaying the number "3". In addition, each indication icon image SX is, for example, substantially circular, and has the same color (for example, light blue) as the replay symbol. Each indication iconic image SX is arranged in the left-right direction, and the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay is instructed by each instruction iconic image SX. Specifically, among the arranged instruction icon images SX, the instruction icon image SX displayed on the left side instructs the order for stopping the left stop button 25L. Further, the instruction icon image SX displayed at the center instructs the order for stopping the middle stop button 25C, and the instruction icon image SX displayed at the right instructs the order for stopping the right stop button 25R.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a-1), in the instruction effect A1, the instruction image SX1 is displayed on the left, the instruction image SX2 is displayed in the center, and the instruction image SX3 is displayed on the right (from the left SX1 , SX2, SX3)). In the above case, the first stop of the left stop button 25L is instructed, the second stop of the middle stop button 25C is instructed, and the third stop of the right stop button 25R is instructed. That is, the stop operation order "left middle right" is designated. Although illustration is omitted, in the instruction effect A2, the instruction image SX1 is displayed on the left side, the instruction image SX3 is displayed in the center, the instruction image SX2 is displayed on the right, and the stop operation order "right and left middle" is instructed. Ru. Similarly, in the instruction effect A3, the instruction image SX2 is displayed on the left, the instruction image SX1 is displayed in the center, the instruction image SX3 is displayed on the right, and the stop operation order "middle left and right" is instructed. The instruction icon image SX3 is displayed on the left, the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed at the center, the instruction icon image SX2 is displayed on the right, and the stop operation order "middle right / left" is instructed. In the instruction effect A5, the instruction icon image SX2 is on the left The instruction icon image SX3 is displayed in the center, the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed on the right, the stop operation order "right-left middle" is instructed, and in the instruction effect A6, the instruction icon image SX3 is displayed on the left, and the instruction icon SX2 is The instruction icon image SX1 is displayed on the right side, and the stop operation order "right middle left" is indicated.

  In each instruction effect A, the instruction icon image SX corresponding to the stop button 25 which should be operated to stop at the present point of time is displayed larger than the other instruction icon image SX. For example, in the instruction effect A1 for instructing the stop operation order "left middle right" shown in 26 (a-1), it is arranged on the left immediately after the game is started (period in which all the reels 12 are rotating) The commanded symbol image SX1 is displayed larger than the other command symbol images SX (2, 3). Thereafter, when the left stop button 25L is operated to stop, the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed in the same size as the instruction icon image SX3, and the instruction icon image SX2 is enlarged and displayed. Thereafter, when the middle stop button 25C is operated to stop, the instruction icon image SX2 is displayed in the same size as the instruction icon image SX1, and the instruction icon image SX3 is enlarged and displayed. According to the above configuration, the stop operation order instructed by the instruction effect A is performed by performing stop operation on the stop button 25 corresponding to the instruction icon image SX which is displayed by being enlarged from other instruction icon images SX at each time point Stop operation is performed.

  FIG. 26A-2 is a simulated view of the instruction display 16 in a period in which the instruction effect A is executed. FIG. 26 (a-2) shows a specific example of the indication display 16 in a period in which the indication effect A1 is executed. In a period in which the instruction effect A1 is executed, as shown in FIG. 26 (a-2), the instruction display 16 displays instruction information “1” (indicating “left middle right”). Although illustration is omitted, instruction information “2” (“inside left and right”) is displayed on the instruction display 16 in a period in which the instruction effect A2 is executed, and in a period in which the instruction effect A3 is executed, The instruction information "3" ("Inside") is displayed on the display unit 16, and the instruction information "4" ("Inside right") is displayed on the instruction display 16 during the period in which the instruction effect A4 is executed. In the period in which the instruction effect A5 is executed, the instruction information “5” (indication of “right and left middle”) is displayed on the instruction display 16, and in the period in which the instruction effect A6 is executed, the instruction display 16 is instructed Information “6” (indicating “right middle left”) is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (b-1) is a schematic view of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the instruction effect B. FIG. 26 (b-1) shows a specific example of the instruction effect B1 when the batting order replay Y1 is won. As described above, in the instruction effect B1, the first left stop that is the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay in the game in which the batting order replay Y1 is won is instructed. The specific example of FIG. 26 (b) assumes a start preparation state as in FIG. 26 (a).

  In the instruction effect B (1 to 3), the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Specifically, the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed in the area corresponding to the first stop button 25 to be stopped. For example, in the instruction effect B1, as shown in FIG. 26 (b-1), the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed in the area on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the instruction effect B1 described above, it is instructed that the left stop button 25L should be stopped first. Although illustration is omitted, in the indication effect B2, an indication icon image SX1 is displayed near the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30, and an instruction to stop the middle stop button 25C is given. In the instruction effect B3, an instruction icon image SX1 is displayed on the right of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30, and an instruction to stop the right stop button 25R is given.

  In the start preparation state, when the stop operation is performed in the order instructed by the instruction effect B, the RT3 transition replay is stopped on the effective line, and the in-AT state is started. When the in-AT state is started, for example, a message of “Start!” May be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30, and the start of the in-AT state may be notified.

  FIG. 26 (b-2) is a schematic view of the instruction display 16 in a period in which the instruction effect B is executed. FIG. 26 (b-2) shows a specific example of the indication display 16 in a period in which the indication effect B 1 is executed. In a period in which the instruction effect B1 is executed, as shown in FIG. 26 (b-2), the instruction display device 16 displays instruction information "7" (instruction to left first stop). Although illustration is omitted, the instruction information "8" is displayed on the instruction display 16 in a period in which the instruction effect B2 is executed, and the instruction information "9" in the instruction display 16 in a period in which the instruction effect B3 is executed. Is displayed.

  FIG. 26C-1 is a simulated view of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the instruction effect C. FIG. FIG. 26 (c-1) shows a specific example of the instruction effect C1 when the batting order bell L is won. As described above, in the instruction effect C1, the first left stop which is the correct pressing order of the middle bell in the game in which the batting bell L is won is instructed. Moreover, the specific example of FIG. 26 (c-1) assumes the state during AT. As shown in FIG. 26 (c-1), in the AT state, the sum of the total number of medals acquired in the current AT state and the number of games played in the AT state (the number “0” in the example of FIG. 26 (c-1) And the number of remaining games in the AT state (the numeral “50” in the example of FIG. 26 (c-1)) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The number of remaining games in the AT state is the current value of the AT counter. The total number of games played in the AT state is incremented by the number "1" in each game, and the number of remaining games is decremented by the number "1" in each game. When the number of remaining games is decremented to the numerical value "0", the transition from the AT state to the end preparation state is made.

  In the instruction effect C (1 to 3), the instruction symbol image SY1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the same manner as the command icon image SX1, the command icon image SY1 displays the numeral "1". In addition, the instruction icon image SY1 is substantially circular as in the case of the instruction icon image SX1. However, the color of the designated icon image SY1 is different from that of the designated icon image SX1. The instruction icon image SY1 is, for example, the same color (yellow) as the bell symbol. However, the configuration may be such that a common instruction image is displayed when the batting order replay is won and when the batting order bell is won.

  The instruction icon image SY1 is displayed in the area corresponding to the stop button 25 to be stopped first, similarly to the instruction icon image SX1. For example, in the instruction effect C1, as shown in FIG. 26 (c-1), the instruction symbol image SY1 is displayed in the area on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above instruction effect C1, it is instructed that the left stop button 25L should be stopped for the first time. Although illustration is omitted, in the indication effect C2, an indication icon image SY1 is displayed near the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30, and an instruction to stop the middle stop button 25C is given. In the instruction effect C3, the instruction symbol image SY1 is displayed on the right side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30, and it is instructed that the right stop button 25R should be stopped first.

  FIG. 26 (c-2) is a schematic view of the instruction display 16 in a period in which the instruction effect C is executed. FIG. 26 (c-2) shows a specific example of the indication display 16 in a period in which the indication effect C1 is executed. As described above, in the period in which the instruction effect C1 is executed, the instruction display device 16 displays the instruction information "7" (the instruction for the first left stop). Further, the instruction information "8" is displayed on the instruction display 16 in a period in which the instruction effect C2 is executed, and the instruction information "9" is displayed on the instruction display 16 in a period in which the instruction effect C3 is executed. .

  As understood from the above description, when the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information "7", the sub CPU 412 according to the present embodiment performs an instruction effect B1 according to the winning combination (strike order replay Y1, bat order bell L). Alternatively, the instruction effect C1 is determined. Further, when the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information “8”, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B2 or the instruction effect C2 according to the winning combination (strike order replay Y2, bat order bell C). Further, when the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information “9”, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B3 or the instruction effect C3 according to the winning combination (strike order replay Y3, bat order bell R). That is, even when the instruction information is the same, the instruction effect changes in accordance with the winning combination. According to the above configuration, for example, compared with the configuration in which the instruction effect does not change according to the winning combination, the instruction effect is rich in change.

  FIG. 26D-1 is a simulated view of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the instruction effect D. FIG. As described above, in the game in which the winning bell is won, when the correct order of the middle bell is instructed by the instruction effect D, the AT state is won as compared with the case where the instruction effect C is instructed. The probability is high. FIG. 26D-1 shows a specific example of the instruction effect D1 when the batting order bell L is won. As described above, in the instruction effect D1, as in the instruction effect C1, the first left stop, which is the correct pushing order of the middle bell in the game in which the batting bell L is won, is instructed.

  In the instruction effect D (1 to 3), the instruction icon image SZ1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. As shown in FIG. 26 (d-1), the indication icon image SZ 1 displays the numeral “1” in the same manner as the indication icon image SX 1 and the indication icon image SY 1. However, the shape (size) of the outer edge of the instruction image SZ1 is different from that of the instruction image SX and the instruction image SY. Specifically, the indicated icon image SZ and the indicated icon image SZ are the outer edge of the jagged edge, while the indicated icon image SX and the indicated icon image SY are substantially circular outer edges. However, the aspect of the instruction icon image SZ1 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the shape of the instruction image SZ1 may be the same as the instruction image SX and the instruction image SY (substantially circular), and the color of the instruction image SZ1 may be different from the other instruction images S (for example, purple).

  The instruction icon image SZ1 is displayed in the area corresponding to the stop button 25 to be stopped first, similarly to the instruction icon image SX1 and the instruction icon image SY1. For example, in the instruction effect D1, as shown in FIG. 26 (d-1), the instruction image SZ1 is displayed in the area on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above instruction effect D1, it is instructed that the left stop button 25L should be stopped for the first time. Further, in the instruction effect D2, an instruction icon image SZ1 is displayed near the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30, and an instruction to stop the middle stop button 25C is given. In the instruction effect D3, an instruction icon image SZ1 is displayed on the right side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30, and an instruction to stop the right stop button 25R is given.

  FIG. 26 (d-2) is a schematic view of the instruction display 16 in a period in which the instruction effect D is executed. The example of the instruction | indication indicator 16 in the period when instruction | indication production D1 is performed is shown by FIG.26 (d-2). As described above, in the period in which the instruction effect D1 is executed, the instruction information “7” is displayed on the instruction display 16 (similar to the instruction effect C1). Further, during the period in which the instruction effect D2 is executed, the instruction information “8” is displayed on the instruction display 16 (similar to the instruction effect C2), and in the period in which the instruction effect D3 is executed “9” is displayed (similar to the instruction effect C3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one stop operation order (for example, the first left stop) is instructed by each of the instruction effects (for example, instruction effect B1, instruction effect C1, and instruction effect D1) having different notification modes. That is, when the sub CPU 412 receives the second command, the instruction effect for instructing the operation mode (order) indicated by the second command is a first instruction effect (for example, the instruction effect B1) and the first instruction effect. It is possible to select from a plurality of notification effects including a second notification effect (for example, instruction effect C1, instruction effect D1) in which the operation mode instructed by the is notified in a notification mode different from the first instruction effect. For example, the sub CPU 412 can select the instruction effect B or the instruction effect C (instruction effect D) according to the winning area (strike order replay, bat order bell). Further, when the batting bell is won, the sub CPU 412 can select the instruction effect C or the instruction effect D. According to the above configuration, for example, compared to a configuration in which only one type of instruction effect for instructing one stop operation order is provided, the instruction effect is rich in change, and the interest is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in addition to the instruction display unit 16. As described above, the liquid crystal display device 30 is larger than the indication display 16 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, notification of the stop operation order is possible in a region wider than the indication display 16. In the above configuration, for example, in comparison with a configuration in which information instructing the stop operation order is displayed only on the instruction display 16, the player can easily view the information.

  The above is the description of each instruction effect (A to D) in the in-AT state and the start preparation state. Each instruction effect in the end preparation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. When the batting order bell is won in the game in the end preparation state, the sub CPU 412 determines the pressing order effect E (1 to 3) as the instruction effect.

  FIG. 27 is a conceptual diagram of an instruction effect determination table C. The sub CPU 412 receives the command “A04” (striking bell) as the first command, and when the commands “B10” to “B12” are received as the second command, the instruction effect determination table C causes the instruction effect ((b)). Determine the order of pushing order. As described above, the commands “B10” to “B12” are transmitted in the end preparation state (see FIG. 19). That is, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect according to the instruction effect determination table C in each game in the end preparation state.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the command “A04” is received in the end preparation state, the sub CPU 412 determines one of the pressing order effects E (1 to 3). Specifically, when the command "A04" is received as the first command and the command "B10" is received as the second command, the sub CPU 412 determines the pushing order effect E1. Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A04” as the first command and receives the command “B11” as the second command, the sub CPU 412 determines the pressing order effect E2, and the command “C” If "B12" is received, the pressing order effect E3 is determined.

  In the above configuration, when the batting bell (L or C) is won in the end preparation state and the instruction number “10” is determined, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “10” on the instruction display unit 16 Then, the sub CPU 412 determines the pressing order effect E1. In the case where the batting bell (L or R) is won and the instruction number "11" is determined, the main CPU 301 displays instruction information "11" on the instruction display 16, and the sub CPU 412 confirms the pushing order. The effect E2 is determined. In the case where the batting bell (C or R) is won and the instruction number "12" is determined, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information "12" on the instruction display 16, and the sub CPU 412 confirms the pushing order. The effect E3 is determined.

  In the push-by-touch effect E1 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the instruction information “10”, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the middle first stop. In the above configuration, when the instruction information “10” of the instruction display 16 is displayed, the pressing operation effect E1 of the liquid crystal display device 30 also indicates that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the middle first stop. Be instructed. Further, in the push-by-touch effect E2, as in the case of the instruction information "11", it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the right first stop. In the above configuration, when the instruction information “11” of the instruction indicator 16 is displayed, the pressing order effect E2 of the liquid crystal display device 30 also indicates that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the right first stop. Be instructed. Further, in the push-by-touch effect E3, as in the case of the instruction information "12", it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed in the middle first stop or the right first stop. In the above configuration, when the indication information “12” of the indication indicator 16 is displayed, the pressing order effect E3 of the liquid crystal display device 30 also indicates that the stop operation should be performed at the first middle stop or the first right stop. Be instructed.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining each push-to-touch effect E (1 to 3). As described above, each order placement effect E is executed when the order placement bell is won in the end preparation state. When the batting bell is won in the end preparation state and the upper and middle bells are dropped, the state shifts to the RT1 state, and the AT state ends. On the other hand, if the batting bell is won in the end preparation state, and the middle bell or the upper bell is stopped on the active line, the AT state continues. That is, each push-to-touch effect E is executed in a game in which the AT state can end. As shown in FIG. 28, in each pressing order effect E, when the middle bell or the upper bell can be stopped at the effective line, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays a message indicating that the AT state can be continued.

  FIG. 28A-1 is a simulated view of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the pressing treatment effect E1. As described above, in the preparation for finishing, the order for hitting order E1 is executed with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting bell L is won, and is performed with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting bell C is won. (See Figure 19). FIG. 28 (a-2) is a schematic view of the instruction display 16 in a period in which the pressing order effect E1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 28 (a-2), the instruction display unit 16 displays instruction information "10" in a period in which the pushing order effect effect E1 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a-1), a plurality of (two) designated icon images SA are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the pushing order effect effect E1. Each designation icon image SA displays a symbol “?” (Question mark), for example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a-1). Further, in the pressing effect effect E1, the instruction icon image SB is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The instruction icon image SB represents, for example, a symbol “x” (cross mark). Each indication icon image SA and the indication icon image SB are arranged in the left-right direction. Specifically, each indication icon image SA is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop button 25 to be subjected to the first stop operation. In addition, the instruction icon image SB is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop button 25 which should not be subjected to the first stop operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a-1), in the pressing order effect E1, the instruction icon image SA is displayed in each of the area on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30 and the area near the center. Further, as shown in FIG. 28A-1, in the pressing order effect E1, the instruction icon image SB is displayed in the area on the right side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the pressing order effect E1 described above, it is instructed that the left stop button 25L or the middle stop button 25C should be stopped first.

  FIG. 28 (b-1) is a schematic view of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the pressing order effect E 2. As described above, in the preparation for finishing, the order for hitting order E2 is executed with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting bell L is won, and is performed with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting bell R is won. (See Figure 19). FIG. 28 (b-2) is a schematic view of the instruction display 16 in a period in which the pressing order effect E 2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 28 (b-2), the instruction display unit 16 displays instruction information “11” in a period in which the pushing order effect effect E 2 is executed.

  As shown in (b-1) of FIG. 28, in the push-to-place effect E2, as in the push-to-place effect E1, the instruction image SA and the instruction image SB are arranged in the right direction on the liquid crystal display device 30. However, the order of arrangement of each of the designated icon image SA and the designated icon image SB is different between the pushing order effect E1 and the pushing order effect E2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28 (b-1), in the pushing order effect effect E 2, the instruction icon image SA is displayed in each of the area on the left side from the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30 and the area on the right side from the center. Be done. Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (b-1), in the pressing order effect E 2, an indication image SB is displayed in the vicinity of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30 (between the indication image SA). In the pressing order effect E2 described above, it is instructed that the left stop button 25L or the right stop button 25R should be stopped first.

  FIG. 28C-1 is a simulated view of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the pressing order effect E3. As described above, the order for pushing order E3 is executed with a probability of about 1/2 when the orderly bell C is won in the preparation for ending state, and is performed with a probability of about 1/2 when the orderly bell R is won. (See Figure 19). FIG. 28 (c-2) is a schematic view of the instruction display 16 in a period in which the pressing order effect E 3 is executed. As shown in FIG. 28 (c-2), the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information "12" in the period in which the pushing order effect E3 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (c-1), in the pushing order effect E3, as in the case of the other pushing order effects E (1, 2), each indication icon image SA and the indication icon image SB are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Arranged horizontally. However, the order of arrangement of each of the designated icon image SA and the designated icon image SB is different between the pressing order effect E3 and the other pressing order effect E. Specifically, as shown in (c-1) in FIG. 28, in the pressing effect effect E3, an indication icon image SA is displayed in the vicinity of the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 and in the region to the right of the center. Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (c-1), in the pressing order effect E3, the instruction icon image SB is displayed in an area on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the pressing order effect E3 described above, it is instructed that the middle stop button 25C or the right stop button 25R should be stopped first.

  FIG. 29A is a conceptual diagram of the effect drawing table of the present embodiment. The effect lottery table is provided, for example, according to the instruction state and the presence or absence of the spinning drum effect. Specifically, an effect drawing table when the turning drum effect is not performed in the normal state, an effect drawing table when the turning drum effect is performed in the normal state, and an effect drawing when the turning drum effect is not executed in the AT state A table and an effect lottery table in the case of executing the turning drum effect in the AT state are provided. In the present embodiment, FIG. 29 (a) shows an effect lottery table in the case where the spinning drum effect is not executed in the normal state, and the illustration of the other effect lottery table is omitted. Note that different effect drawing tables may be provided according to the type (A to D) of the turning drum effect.

  The sub CPU 412 determines an effect in each game using the effect lottery table. In each game of the normal game, various effects including normal effect, watermelon navigation effect, cherry navigation effect, bell navigation effect, chance effect, final effect, aiming effect and development effect are executed. The effect lottery table is configured to include each lottery value V for each first command (A00 to A13). In addition, each lottery value V is provided for each effect. In FIG. 29A, the lottery value V other than the numerical value "0" is larger than the numerical value "0".

  The sub CPU 412 determines the effect of the game using the random number value R4 and each lottery value V in the effect lottery process of each game. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts the random number R4 in the order of the lottery value VH of the development effect from the lottery value VT of "no effect" in the effect lottery process. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect of a lottery value in which the result of subtraction of the random number value R4 becomes a negative number. For example, when the command “A09” (weak chance eye) is received, the sub CPU 412 subtracts the lottery value VNJ of “no effect” to the random value R4. If the result of subtracting the lottery value VNJ to the random number R4 is a negative number, the sub CPU 412 determines not to execute the effect. On the other hand, when the subtraction result is not a negative number, the lottery value VTJ of the normal effect is subtracted from the subtraction result. When the subtraction result of the lottery value VTJ of the normal effect is a negative number, the sub CPU 412 determines the normal effect.

  As described above, the type of batting order replay won in the current game can not be identified from the command “A01” when batting order replay (X1 to X6, Y1 to Y3) is won. Therefore, the sub CPU 412 determines the effect by the common lottery value V (for example, the lottery value VNB) regardless of the type of batting order replay. Also, as described above, the type of batting bell won in the current game can not be identified from the command “A04” when the batting bell (L, C, R) is won. Therefore, the sub CPU 412 determines the effect by the common lottery value V (for example, the lottery value VNE) regardless of the type of batting bell. In the above configuration, when the batting bell or batting order replay is won in the normal state, the correct pushing order of the middle bell or the RT transition replay is not notified (suggested) by each effect.

The watermelon navigation effect is determined when the watermelon (watermelon role) is won. As shown in FIG. 29A, the lottery value of the watermelon navigation effect is a numerical value "0" except when the command "A06" is received (when the watermelon is won). In the watermelon navigation effect, for example, an image representing a watermelon pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above watermelon navigation effect, it is notified that the watermelon has been won. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which watermelon navigation presentation is performed by the game which other than watermelon was elected. For example, in the game in which the overlapping bonus (watermelon role + bonus role) is won, the watermelon navigation effect may be executed.
.

  The Cherry Navi presentation is determined when a weak cherry (corn cherry) or a strong cherry (middle cherry) is won. As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the lottery value for the Cherry Navi effect is a numerical value "0" except when the command "A07" is received or the command "A08" is received. In the cherry navigation effect, for example, an image representing a cherry pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above-described cherry navigation effect, the winning of a cherry combination (corn cherry, middle cherry) is notified. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which cherry navi production is performed by the game which other than a cherry combination was elected.

  The bell navigation effect is determined when the common bell (middle bell) is won. As shown in FIG. 29A, the lottery value of the bell navigation effect is a numerical value "0" except when the command "A05" is received (when the common bell is won). In the bell navigation effect, for example, an image representing a bell symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above-described bell navigation effect, the winning of the common bell is notified. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which a bell navigator presentation is performed in the game which other than the common bell was elected.

  The chance effect is determined when the strong chance (first player B) is won. As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the lottery value for the chance effect is a numerical value "0" except when the command "A10" is received. In the chance presentation, for example, a message of “chance!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above configuration, when the chance effect is executed, the player can recognize that the strong chance (the first sheet B) is won. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which chance presentation is performed by the game which other than the strong chance eyes were elected.

  The fixed effect is determined when a single bonus (bonus combination) is won in the non-group winning area. As shown in FIG. 29A, the lottery value of the fixed effect is a numerical value "0" except when the command "A13" is received. In the confirmed effect, for example, a message of “Bonus confirmed!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above configuration, when the fixed effect is executed, the player can recognize that the single bonus is won. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which a fixed effect is performed in the game which other than the single bonus was elected. For example, in the game in which the duplicate bonus is won, the determined effect may be executed.

  The aim production is determined when BAR replay or normal replay is won among non-group winning areas. As shown in FIG. 29A, the lottery value of the aiming effect is a numerical value "0" except when the command "A02" or the command "A03" is received. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which aim production | presentation is performed by the game which other than single BAR replay or normal replay was won. Further, for example, the aiming effect may be executed only when the BAR replay is won.

  FIG. 30A is a simulated view of a screen displayed by the liquid crystal display device 30 in the aim effect. As shown in FIG. 30 (a-1), in the aim effect, the command icon image SW1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Each designation icon image SW1 displays the number "1". The instruction icon image SW1 is, for example, substantially circular. As shown in FIG. 30 (a-1), in the aiming effect, the instruction icon image SW1 is displayed on the right side of the screen center. In the aim production described above, the first right stop, which is the correct pressing order of BAR replay, is instructed. In addition, in the aiming effect, a message of "reverse push" is displayed in addition to the instruction icon image SW1. However, either one of the instruction icon image SW or the message "reverse push" may be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, in the aiming effect, the white BAR graphic image GW is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The white BAR iconic image GW represents the white BAR symbol of each reel 12. In (a-1) of FIG. 30, it is instructed to aim the white BAR symbol on each reel 12. In the aiming effect described above, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the timing at which the white BAR symbol can be stopped on each reel 12 at the first right stop. In the game in which the BAR replay is won, when the stop operation is performed according to the instruction, the BAR replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and a symbol combination of "white BAR-white BAR-white BAR" is displayed on the upper line. On the other hand, in the game in which the BAR replay is won, when the stop operation is not performed in the operation mode instructed by the aiming effect, the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  In the game in which the normal replay is won, when the stop operation is performed according to the instruction of the aiming effect, the normal replay is displayed on the effective line and the symbol combination of "star bell-white BAR-white BAR" is displayed on the upper line . That is, in the game in which the normal replay is won, when the stop operation is performed according to the instruction of the aiming effect, the white BAR symbol tempers on the upper line at the time of the second stop operation, but the left reel 12L is subjected to the third stop operation , The star bell pattern stops in the upper stage of the left reel 12L, not the white BAR pattern. When the normal replay is won, the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line even if the instruction of the aim production is followed or not.

  FIG. 30 (a-2) is a simulated view of the indication display 16 in the aiming effect. As described above, when the BAR replay or the normal replay is won, "no indication" is determined regardless of the indication state (see FIG. 18). Therefore, the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction display 16 in the aim effect.

  In the normal state of the present embodiment, for batting bells and batting replays that can significantly affect the ball out rate, effects (instruction effects) according to the type of winning area are not executed, but the effect on the ball out rate is small. For the group winning combination, effects (watermelon navigation effects etc.) according to the type of the winning area are executed. According to the above configuration, for example, the effect is richer in comparison with the configuration in which the effect corresponding to the type of the winning area is not executed at all. Further, in the normal state, the effects according to the type of the winning area are limited to the effects according to the type of non-group winning combination having a small influence on the payout rate, so the effects are disbursed while enriching the effects The influence that can be given to the rate can be reduced. According to the above configuration, for example, the player who does not know the advantageous stop operation mode that can be identified by the effect and the case where the player (expert) who knows the advantageous stop operation mode that can be identified by the effect plays The difference in the payout rate from when a (beginner) plays is small. Therefore, even beginners can play with peace of mind.

  Description will be returned to FIG. As understood from FIG. 29A, when the watermelon, the weak chance eye, the strong chance eye, the double bonus, or the single bonus is won in this game, the development effect may be determined. When the development effect is determined, the continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 30 over the next three games. Specifically, when the development rendition is determined, the sub CPU 412 determines a defeat scenario or a victory scenario. Further, the sub CPU 412 executes continuous effects according to the determined scenario over three games.

  FIG. 29B is a conceptual diagram of a scenario lottery table. The sub CPU 412 determines a scenario using the scenario lottery table. The scenario lottery table is provided, for example, according to the instruction state. As shown in FIG. 29 (b), the scenario lottery table is configured to include the lottery value of the defeat scenario and the lottery value of the winning scenario. Further, the lottery value of each scenario is provided for each winning area. Each lottery value is subtracted to random number value R4, and a scenario in which the subtraction result becomes a negative number is determined. As understood from FIG. 29 (b), when the watermelon, the weak chance eye or the strong chance eye is won, a defeat scenario is determined. On the other hand, when a duplicate bonus or a single bonus is won, a winning scenario is determined. That is, the defeat scenario is determined when the bonus combination is not won, and the victory scenario is determined when the bonus combination is won.

  In the continuous effect, for example, an animation in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 over three games. When the defeat scenario is determined, an animation in which the ally character is defeated is displayed in the final game of the continuous effect. On the other hand, when the winning scenario is determined, an animation in which the ally character wins is displayed in the final game of the continuous effect. That is, in the final game of the continuous effect, the defeat of the teammate character is notified. In the above configuration, it is informed whether or not the bonus combination is won in the final game of the continuous effect. The sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute a notification effect when the continuous effect ends.

  As described above, when the bonus combination is won, the main CPU 301 sets the initial value “3” to the transition counter, and maintains the normal state over three games. That is, the main CPU 301 does not shift to the bonus notification state (AT state) until three games have passed since the bonus combination was won. Therefore, the instruction state of each game of the continuous effect is the normal state even when the bonus combination is won or when the bonus combination is not won. In the above configuration, the player does not recognize whether or not the bonus combination is won according to the instruction state (presence or absence of display of instruction information) in each game of the continuous effect. If the instruction information is displayed in the middle of the continuous effect and the winning of the bonus combination is notified, the player may feel that the fun of the continuous effect and the notification effect disappears. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the instruction information is not displayed in the continuous effect, the inconvenience that the fun of the continuous effect and the notification effect is impaired is suppressed.

  FIG. 31 is a timing chart for describing a period in which instruction information is displayed and a period in which each effect (instruction effect, navigation effect) is performed. FIG. 31 shows a period in which the instruction information is displayed and a period in which each effect is executed in one game.

  FIG. 31 (a) is a diagram for explaining a period in which instruction information is displayed and a period in which instruction effect is performed in a game in which a batting bell is won and a turning drum effect is not executed. . As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when a game start operation is performed, a wait period is started. As described above, the wait period is provided to make the average time length of each game longer than 4.1 seconds. If the time length from the time of the previous game start operation to the time of the current game start operation exceeds 4.1 seconds, the wait period of the current game is 0 seconds. Also, as described above, when the wait period ends, the acceleration period starts. The acceleration period includes a period for accelerating each reel 12 to a constant speed. When the acceleration period ends, the stop operation reception period starts. The stop operation reception period is a period in which the stop operation for each stop button 25 can be received. When the third stop operation is received, all the reels 12 stop and the stop operation acceptance period ends.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, when the game start operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command (B07 to B09) to the sub CPU 412. Immediately after transmitting the second command, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information (7 to 9). In the above configuration, the time when the second command is transmitted and the start time PA1 of the display of the instruction information become substantially simultaneous. The main CPU 301 may be configured to transmit the second command after displaying the instruction information on the instruction display 16. As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the indication display 16 continuously displays indication information until the third stop operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, when the second command is received, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute instruction effects (C1 to C3 and D1 to D3). Specifically, when the second command is received, the sub CPU 412 immediately transmits an effect command for executing the instruction effect to the image control CPU 421, and when the image control CPU 421 receives the effect command, the instruction effect is transmitted. The liquid crystal display device 30 is made to execute immediately. In the above configuration, the time when the second command is received and the start time PB1 of the instruction effect become substantially simultaneous. As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the liquid crystal display device 30 continuously executes the instruction effect until the third stop operation is performed.

  As described above, the start time PA1 of the display of the instruction information in the instruction display 16 is substantially simultaneous with the time when the second command is transmitted. Further, the start time PB1 of the instruction effect in the liquid crystal display device 30 is substantially simultaneous with the time when the second command is received. The time length required for transmission and reception of the second command in this embodiment is negligibly short. Therefore, in the above configuration, it can be said that the start time PA1 of the display of the instruction information and the start time PB1 of the instruction effect are substantially simultaneous. Although illustration is omitted, in the game in which the batting order replay is won, the point in time when the instruction information is displayed and the point in time when the instruction effect is executed are substantially the same as in the game in which the batting order is won.

  By the way, in the configuration in which the stop operation mode is instructed by both the instruction information and the instruction effect, a player who wants to pay attention to the instruction information and a player who wants to pay attention to the instruction effect are assumed. Temporarily, if the time to start the instruction effect is later than the time to start the display of the instruction information, the player who wants to pay attention to the instruction effect has a waiting time until the instruction effect is executed after the instruction information is displayed . On the other hand, when the time to start displaying the instruction information is later than the time to start the instruction effect, the player who wants to pay attention to the instruction information has a waiting time until the instruction information is displayed after the instruction effect is executed. . In consideration of the above circumstances, the main CPU 301 of the present embodiment starts displaying the instruction information substantially simultaneously with the instruction effect. In the above configuration, the waiting time of each player described above is reduced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31A, the start time PA1 of the display of the instruction information and the start time PB1 of the instruction effect are before the start time of the stop operation acceptance period. According to the above configuration, before the start of the stop operation reception period, the correct pressing order of each winning combination is instructed by the instruction information and the instruction effect. It is temporarily assumed that the correct pressing order of each winning combination is instructed after the start of the stop operation accepting period. In the above configuration, depending on the player, there may be a disadvantage that the stop operation is performed in an order other than the correct push order before the correct push order is instructed. In the present embodiment, since the correct pressing order is instructed before the stop operation becomes possible, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

  FIG. 31 (b) is a game in which a batting bell is won, and is a game in which a turning drum effect is executed, and is a view for explaining a period in which instruction information is displayed and a period in which instruction effect is executed. is there. In the above case, when the game start operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the spinning drum effect is started. The spinning drum effect may be started after the weight period has elapsed.

  The main CPU 301 executes a rotating drum effect in a period of a predetermined time length (for example, about 2 seconds to 5 seconds). The execution time of each turning drum effect is different. In addition, in a period in which the turning drum effect is executed, the liquid crystal display device 30 executes the effect during the freeze. The effect during freezing may be provided for each rotating drum effect, or may be common to each rotating drum effect. In the effect during the freeze, the stop operation order is not instructed.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the spinning drum effect is finished, an acceleration period is started. In addition, when 4.1 seconds have not passed from the start operation of the last game at the time of turning drum effect completion, it transfers to an acceleration period via a weight period. As shown in FIG. 31B, in the acceleration period, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command to the sub CPU 412, and then causes the indication display 16 to display indication information. In the example of FIG. 31B, the start time PA2 of the display of the instruction information is immediately before the start of the stop operation reception period (substantially simultaneously with the start time of the stop operation reception period). The point in time when the second command is transmitted may be earlier than the start point in time of the stop operation acceptance period, and is not limited to the acceleration period.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, the liquid crystal display device 30 executes the effect during freezing until the stop operation reception period starts, and executes the instruction effect substantially at the same time as the start time of the stop operation reception period. That is, the start time point of the stop operation reception period and the start time point PB2 of the instruction effect become substantially simultaneous. As understood from the above description, in the configuration of FIG. 31B, the start time PA2 of the display of the instruction information and the start time PB2 of the instruction effect are substantially simultaneous.

  In the above configuration, since the start time PA2 of the display of the instruction information and the start time PB2 of the instruction effect are substantially simultaneous, attention is paid to the instruction information as in the case where the spinning drum effect is not executed (FIG. 30A). The waiting time for the instruction of the stop operation order is reduced for both the player and the player focusing on the instruction effect. In the “substantially simultaneous” in the present embodiment, the start time point PA (1, 2) and the start time point PB (1, 2) may not completely coincide with each other. Specifically, it is sufficient for the player to perceive that the start point PA and the start point PB are almost simultaneous. Also, there may be a game in which the start point PA and the start point PB are not substantially simultaneous.

  FIG. 31 (c) is a game in which a player is elected as a rare character (for example, watermelon), and is a view for explaining a period in which a navigation effect (for example, watermelon navigation effect) is executed in a game in which a turning drum effect is executed. is there. The navi effect, as described above, informs (suggests) the winning combination of the current game. As shown in FIG. 31C, when the game start operation is performed, the effect during freezing is executed by the liquid crystal display device 30 as in the game (FIG. 31B described above) in which the batting bell is won. Further, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command in the acceleration period. However, the second command transmitted when the rare character is won is "B99" (without instruction). In the above case, the indication display 16 does not display indication information. The start time point PC of the navi effect is substantially simultaneous with the start time of the stop operation reception period, similarly to the instruction effect.

  Temporarily, in the game in which the spinning drum effect is executed, it is assumed that the stop operation order is instructed immediately after the start operation (hereinafter, referred to as a “contrast example”). For example, a configuration may be considered in which the indication display 16 displays indication information immediately after the start operation. In the above contrast example, instruction information is displayed during the effect during freezing. However, the instruction information is displayed when the batting bell is won, and is not displayed when the rare character is won. Therefore, when the instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player recognizes that the batting order bell has been won in the current game. That is, it is also stated that it is recognized that the rare character is not won in the current game before the stop operation acceptance period starts. In the above comparative example, the effect (instruction effect or navigation effect) to be executed at the start of the stop operation reception period can be estimated, and the player may feel that the effect is lacking in interest. In consideration of the above-described circumstances, in the present embodiment, the stop operation order is not instructed in the period of the turning drum effect. According to the above configuration, it is difficult to estimate the effect to be performed until the navigation effect or the instruction effect is performed, and the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed as compared with the comparative example. However, the stop operation order may be instructed by the instruction information or the instruction effect during a period in which the turning drum effect is executed.

  The sub RAM 414 includes storage areas for storing data generated and updated as the sub CPU 412 executes each process.

<Each process executed by main CPU>
The main CPU 301 executes various processes using the above-described data. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the boot process of the main CPU 301. When the reset signal from the reset circuit is input, the main CPU 301 executes the startup process. The reset signal is output when the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board 300 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when the supply of the power supply voltage to the main control board 300 is started by turning on the power switch 511SW, the start-up process is performed.

  When the boot process is started, the main CPU 301 executes a boot time initialization process (S1). The main CPU 301 initializes the registers and the like of the main control board 300 by the initialization processing at startup. Note that the main CPU 301 may execute security check processing to determine the legitimacy of the control program stored in the main ROM 302 before the initialization processing at startup.

  After the startup initialization process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the setting switch is in the ON state (S2). The setting switch is turned on when the setting key is inserted into a keyhole provided inside the gaming machine 1 and rotated. When the main CPU 301 determines that the setting switch is in the ON state (S2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a setting change start command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S3), and shifts to setting change processing.

  On the other hand, when determining that the setting switch is not in the ON state (S2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the backup flag is stored in the main RAM 303 (S4). In the present embodiment, when the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board 300 falls below a predetermined threshold (when the power is shut off), the main CPU 301 backs up each data stored in the main RAM 303, The backup flag is stored in the RAM 303. Therefore, if the backup is normally executed when the power is shut off, the backup flag is stored in the main RAM 303.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the backup flag is stored (S4: YES), the main CPU 301 calculates a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 303 (S5). In the present embodiment, even when the power is shut off, the checksum of the main RAM 303 is calculated and stored as in step S4 of the activation process.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the checksum calculated at step S4 (checksum at power on) and the checksum calculated at power off coincide with each other (S6). If the data in the main RAM 303 has not changed in the period from the time the power is shut off to the time it is turned on, the checksum at power on and the checksum at power off match. On the other hand, if the data in the main RAM 303 changes (deteriorates) in the period from the time the power is shut off to the time it is turned on, the checksum at power on and the checksum at power off do not match.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the checksum at power on and the checksum at power off match (S6: YES), the time at which the power is shut off based on each data stored in the main RAM 303 (backup is Each register is restored to the state at the time of execution) (S7). When the state of each register is restored, the main control board 300 is in the state at the time when the power is shut off. When the main CPU 301 restores the state of each register (the state of the main control board 300), the processing is restarted from the step at the time when the power is shut off. The main CPU 301 transmits, to the sub control board 400, various types of information necessary for restoring the effect state of the gaming machine 1 when the state of the main control board 300 is restored.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the backup flag is not stored (S4: NO), or determines that the checksum at power on and the checksum at power off do not match (S6: NO), A main RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the main RAM 303 is set (S8). That is, when the backup can not be performed or when the data of the main RAM 303 changes during the period when the power is shut off, the main RAM abnormality flag is set. In a period in which the main RAM abnormality flag is set, the main CPU 301 reports an abnormality of the main RAM using, for example, the main display ML. The main RAM abnormality flag is cleared, for example, when the setting value change processing is normally executed.

  After setting the main RAM abnormality flag, the main CPU 301 shifts to RAM error processing. In the RAM error processing, the progress of the game is prohibited. In the RAM error processing, the main CPU 301 may send a command to notify the abnormality of the main RAM 303 to the sub control board 400, and for example, the liquid crystal display device 30 may display a warning image.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart of setting change processing. When the setting change process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether the front door 3 is opened (S11). For example, a door sensor that outputs an OFF signal when the front door 3 is closed and outputs an ON signal when the front door 3 is opened is provided, and the front door 3 is opened according to a signal from the door sensor. A configuration may be employed in which the main CPU 301 determines whether or not there is. As described above, since the setting switch is provided inside the gaming machine 1, the setting change processing is usually performed during the period when the front door 3 is opened, and the front door 3 is closed. When the setting change process is started in the state, it is assumed that the ON signal of the setting switch and the power switch 511SW is input due to a wrongdoing. If it is determined that the front door 3 is not opened in consideration of the above circumstances (S11: NO), the main CPU 301 sets the setting switch abnormality flag to ON (S12), and shifts to setting switch error processing. Do. In the setting switch error processing, the progress of the game is prohibited. Further, in the setting switch error processing, the main CPU 301 may transmit an error command notifying that the setting switch is abnormal to the sub control board 400, and the liquid crystal display device 30 may display a warning image, for example. The setting switch abnormality flag is cleared when the start process is restarted and the setting value change process is normally performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the front door 3 is opened (S11: YES), the main CPU 301 displays a numerical value indicating a setting value on the setting display unit 36 (S13). Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the numerical value stored in the display setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 on the setting display unit 36.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 301 determines whether the setting change button 37 has been operated (S14). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether an ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input. If it is determined that the setting change button 37 has been operated (S14: YES), the main CPU 301 increments the numerical value stored in the display setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 (S15), and shifts the processing to step S16. On the other hand, when determining that the setting change button 37 is not operated (S14: NO), the main CPU 301 shifts the processing to step S16 without incrementing the numerical value of the display setting value storage area.

  In step S16, the main CPU 301 determines whether the start lever 24 has been operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the ON signal of the start switch 24SW is input. The main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step S13 to step S15 until determining that the start lever 24 has been operated (S16: NO). As understood from the above description, each time the setting change button 37 is operated and the numerical value of the display setting value storage area is added in step S15, the numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36 is added in step S13. .

  On the other hand, when determining that the start lever 24 has been operated (S16: YES), the main CPU 301 determines the numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36 as the setting value (S17). Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the numerical value stored in the display setting value storage area in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 stores a setting value command indicating the setting value in the command storage area (S18). After storing the set value command, the main CPU 301 ends the set value change process and shifts to the game control process. In addition, in the period of starting processing or setting change processing, when interruption of other processing is prohibited and it shifts to game control processing, interruption is permitted thereafter.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the game control processing of the main CPU 301. The game control process is executed each time the player plays a game. Although described later in detail, the main CPU 301 executes interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1.49 ms) in a period in which the game control processing is executed. That is, the main CPU 301 executes game control processing and interrupt processing alternately. For example, a command (for example, a start operation command to be described later) transmitted to the sub control board 400 is set in the game control process and transmitted to the sub control board 400 in an interrupt process. Also, each timer (for example, wait timer) set in the game control process is decremented in the interrupt process.

  When the main CPU 301 starts the game control process, the main CPU 301 executes an initial setting process (S101). The initial setting process is executed each time one game is over. The main CPU 301 initializes a storage area of the storage areas of the main RAM 303, which is initialized for each game, in the initial setting process.

  After the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 shifts to an automatic insertion process (S102). In the automatic insertion process, the main CPU 301 sets the bet medals of the same number as the previous game as the bet medals of the current game, when the symbol combinations relating to the replay are aligned on the activated line as a result of the previous game.

  After the automatic insertion process, the main CPU 301 shifts to a pre-game start process (S103). In the pre-game start process, the main CPU 301 detects the medal from the medal insertion portion 8 and detects the operation of the settlement button 23. Further, the main CPU 301 detects the operation of the start lever 24 (that is, the game start operation) in the pre-game start process.

  When the main CPU 301 detects a game start operation in the pre-game start process, the main CPU 301 shifts to setting value check process (S104). In the setting value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 determines the propriety of the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 303. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area is in the range of the numerical value “1” to the numerical value “6” in the set value confirmation process. If the main CPU 301 determines that the set value is not within the range of the numerical value “1” to the numerical value “6”, the main CPU 301 stores a set value abnormality command indicating abnormality of the set value in the command storage area, and shifts to set value error processing. . For example, when the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed due to noise, set value error processing is performed. In the setting value error processing, the main CPU 301 cancels the game control processing (prohibits the progression of the game). When setting value error processing is executed, for example, when the power button 511 is turned off and then turned on again to cause the main CPU 301 to execute start processing and setting change processing, and a normal setting value is set , Return to the state where the game is possible.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the setting value is appropriate in the setting value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 acquires the random number value R1, the random number value R2 and the random number value R3 (S105). The random number value R1 is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 304, and is used in the internal lottery process. The random number value R2 is a software random number acquired from a register incorporated in the main CPU 301, and is used in a rotating drum effect determination process or the like. The random value R3 is used in the AT determination process. The main CPU 301 stores the acquired random number value R1 in the random number value R1 storage area of the main RAM 303. Similarly, the main CPU 301 stores the acquired random number R2 in the random number R2 storage area of the main RAM 303, and stores the random number R3 in the random number R3 storage area of the main RAM 303.

  After storing the random number value R1, the random number value R2 and the random number value R3 in the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 shifts to lottery execution processing (S106). The lottery execution process is an internal lottery process for determining the winning area by the random value R1, an AT determination process for determining the transition to the AT state by the random value R3, and a rotating drum effect by the random value R2. It is comprised by each process including the rotation drum production | presentation determination process for. In addition, the lottery execution process includes an instruction number determination process for determining an instruction number.

  After executing the lottery execution process, the main CPU 301 executes a weight process (S107). The weight process is a process for setting the time length of each game to a predetermined length or more. The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the wait period has elapsed in the wait process, and if it is determined that the wait period has not elapsed, the wait process does not shift from the wait process to a process described below.

  On the other hand, when determining that the wait period has elapsed, the main CPU 301 shifts to pre-stop processing (S108). In the pre-shutdown process, various data (such as priority to be described later) are stored in the main RAM 303 according to the winning area determined in the internal lottery process. In the stop control process described later, the respective reels 12 are stopped according to the data stored in the pre-stop process, and the symbol combination relating to the winning combination designated in the winning area is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

  After executing the pre-shutdown process, the main CPU 301 shifts to the stop control process (S109). In the stop control process, the main CPU 301 stops the reel 12 corresponding to the stop button 25 each time the stop button 25 is operated. Each reel 12 stops at the symbol position according to each data set in the above-described pre-stop process.

  When all reels 12 are stopped in the stop control process, the main CPU 301 shifts to the display determination process (S110). In the display determination process, the main CPU 301 determines the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line. In addition, the main CPU 301 sets various data in accordance with the type of combination of symbols displayed on the activated line. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination relating to the replay is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the main CPU 301 sets the replaying in progress flag to the ON state. Further, when the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol combination relating to the winning combination is stopped on the activated line, the main CPU 301 adds the number of medals corresponding to the type of the winning combination to the credit number.

  After executing the display determination process, the main CPU 301 executes a game state transition process (S111). In the gaming state transition processing, the main CPU 301 shifts the gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 shifts the RT state according to the RT shift symbol stopped and displayed on the activated line. Further, when the symbol combination relating to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the main CPU 301 shifts to the bonus operating state, and ends the bonus operating state according to the number of medals paid out. Further, the main CPU 301 shifts the instruction state by the game state transition process. When the main CPU 301 ends the gaming state transition processing, the main CPU 301 returns the processing to step S101.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart of initial setting processing at the end of the game. In the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 initializes a storage area for storing information necessary for one game among the storage areas of the main RAM 303 (S101-1). For example, the winning area storage area storing the winning area (winning area number) of the previous game is initialized in the initial setting process.

  After initializing the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 determines whether the auxiliary storage unit 530 is full (S101-2). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the ON signal from the full tank sensor 530SE is input. When it is determined that the auxiliary storage unit 530 is full (S101-2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a full error command (S101-3), and shifts to full error processing.

  In the full-tank error processing, the main CPU 301 uses the indication display 16 to notify of a full-tank error. For example, during the full error processing, the main CPU 301 causes the indication display 16 to display the characters “HF” (hopper full). In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports a full tank error with another indicator (for example, storage sheet number indicator 17). When the main CPU 301 determines that the auxiliary storage unit 530 is not full (S101-2: NO), the pre-game start pre-processing is ended and the processing shifts to the automatic insertion processing.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the automatic insertion process. When the main CPU 301 starts the automatic insertion processing, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the symbol combination relating to the replay is complete on the activated line in the previous game (S102-1). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the in-replay flag is set. The in-replay flag is set in the display determination process of the previous game control process. If the symbol combination relating to the replay in the previous game is not in line with the active line (S102-1: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the automatic insertion processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol combination relating to the replay in the previous game is aligned with the active line (S102-1: YES), the main CPU 301 stores the input command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S102- 2). After storing the closing command, the main CPU 301 sets a closing interval timer (S102-3). The closing interval timer is a timer for securing a time interval at which the closing command is transmitted to the sub control board 400 at a predetermined time length or more. When the closing interval timer is set, the main CPU 301 determines whether the closing interval timer has timed out (S102-4). The main CPU 301 repeats step S102-4 until determining that the closing interval timer has timed out (S102-4: NO).

  If it is determined that the insertion interval timer has timed out (S102-4: YES), the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value "1" to the bet number counter (S102-5). The bet number counter indicates the number of bet medals for the current game. Further, the main CPU 301 generates BET lamp display data indicating the display mode of the BET lamps 14 (14a, 14b, 14c) according to the value of the bet number counter (S102-6). Specifically, when the bet number counter has a numerical value "1", BET lamp display data for lighting one lamp 14a of the BET lamps 14 is generated. Similarly, when the bet number counter has the value "2", the BET lamp display data to light one lamp 14a and the two sheet lamp 14b of the BET lamps 14 is generated, and the bet number counter has the value "3". In the BET lamp 14, BET lamp display data for lighting the one lamp 14a, the two lamp 14b and the three lamp 14c among the BET lamps 14 is generated. The BET lamp display data is stored in the lamp related data storage area of the main RAM 303.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the bet number counter matches the bet medal of the previous game (S102-7). The main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step S102-2 to step S102-6 until it is determined that the value of the bet number counter matches the bet medal of the previous game (S102-7: NO). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the bet number counter matches the bet medal of the previous game (S102-7: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the automatic insertion process. As understood from the above description, when the symbol combination relating to replay is aligned with the effective line as a result of the previous game, the same bet medal as the bet medal of the previous game is set in this game.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart of pre-game start processing. When the main CPU 301 starts the pre-game start process, the main CPU 301 refers to the game state flag in the game state storage area of the main RAM 303 to set a prescribed number (S103-1). In the present embodiment, the prescribed number is set to the numerical value "3" in any game.

  After setting the prescribed number according to the gaming state, the main CPU 301 shifts to insertion medal acceptance processing (S103-2). In the inserted medal acceptance process, the main CPU 301 receives a medal from the medal insertion portion 8. When the main CPU 301 receives the medal from the medal insertion section 8, the main CPU 301 adds the bet number counter or the credit number.

  After executing the insertion medal acceptance process, the main CPU 301 shifts to BET operation acceptance process (S103-3). The main CPU 301 receives an operation of the player's 1 BET button 21 or an operation of the MAX-BET button 22 in the BET operation acceptance process.

  After executing the BET operation acceptance process, the main CPU 301 shifts to a settlement operation acceptance process (S103-4). The main CPU 301 receives the player's operation of the settlement button 23 in the settlement operation reception process.

  After executing the settlement operation reception process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the bet number counter is the prescribed number (S103-5). In the above-described automatic insertion process of step S102, the inserted medal acceptance process of step S103-2, or the bet operation acceptance process of step S103-3, when the bet number counter is added up to the specified number, the main CPU 301 selects the bet number counter. Is determined to be the prescribed number (S103-5: YES), and the process proceeds to step S103-6. On the other hand, when the bet number counter has not reached the specified number (S103-5: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes each step from step S103-2 to step S103-4.

  At step S103-6, the main CPU 301 determines whether the player has operated the start lever 24 or not. If it is determined that the start lever 24 has been operated (S103-6: YES), the main CPU 301 stores the start operation command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S103-7). When the start operation command is stored, the main CPU 301 ends the pre-game start processing and shifts to setting value confirmation processing (S104). On the other hand, when determining that the start lever has not been operated (S103-6: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes each step from step S103-2 to step S103-5.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the input medal accepting process. When the inserted medal acceptance process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the insertion impossible flag is in the ON state (S103-2-1). When the bet number counter is the upper limit value and the credit number is the upper limit value, the insertion impossible flag is set to the ON state in S103-2-8 described later. When the main CPU 301 determines that the insertion impossible flag is in the ON state (S103-2-1: YES), the insertion medal accepting process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301 determines that the insertion impossible flag is not in the ON state (S103-2-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the medal has been inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 (S103-2-2). ).

  Specifically, as described above, the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 is detected by the signal from the medal sensor 34SE. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 reads the signal from the medal sensor 34SE in the input port reading process of the interruption process that is periodically executed, and detects the medal of the main RAM 303 according to the signal from the medal sensor 34SE. Set the flag to ON state. At step S103-2-2, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the medal detection flag is in the ON state.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that a medal has been inserted from the medal insertion section 8 (S103-2-2: YES), the main CPU 301 stores an input command indicating that a medal has been inserted in the command storage area (S103-2-3). ).

  After storing the input command, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the bet number counter is the prescribed number (S103-2-4). If it is determined that the bet number counter is not the prescribed number (S103-2-4: NO), the main CPU 301 adds the numerical value "1" to the bet number counter (S103-2-5), and the inserted medal acceptance processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when determining that the bet number counter is the prescribed number (S103-2-4: YES), the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value "1" to the credit number (S103-2-6).

  After adding the number of credits, the main CPU 301 determines whether the number of credits matches the upper limit "50" (S103-2-7). If it is determined that the number of credits is the numerical value "50" (S103-2-7: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the medal insertion impossible flag to the ON state (S103-2-8), and the inserted medal acceptance processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301 determines that the number of credits is not the numerical value "50" (S103-2-7: NO), the inserted medal acceptance processing is ended without setting the medal insertion impossible flag to the ON state. . The main CPU 301 controls the selector 34 so that the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 is led to the outside of the gaming machine 1 in a period in which the medal insertion impossible flag is set to the ON state. Therefore, the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 8 is discharged to the outside (the tray unit 7) of the gaming machine 1 while the medal insertion impossible flag is in the ON state.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart of BET operation acceptance processing. In the BET operation acceptance process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of credits is the numerical value "0" (S103-3-1). If the number of credits is “0” (S103-3-1: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process.

  If it is determined that the number of credits is not "0" (S103-3-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the 1 BET button 21 has been operated (S103-3-2). If it is determined that the 1 BET button 21 has been operated (S103-3-2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the insertion request counter to the numerical value "1" (S103-3-3). On the other hand, when determining that the 1 BET button 21 has not been operated (S103-3-2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the MAX-BET button 22 has been operated (S103-3-4). . If it is determined that the MAX-BET button 22 has been operated (S103-3-4: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the value "3" in the closing request counter (S103-3-5). When determining that the MAX-BET button 22 has not been operated (S103-3-4: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process.

  When the predetermined value (numerical value “1” or numerical value “3”) is set in the closing request counter in step S103-3-3 or step S103-3-5, the main CPU 301 determines the numerical value “1” from the closing request counter. Is subtracted (S103-3-6). When the input request counter is decremented by "1", the main CPU 301 subtracts the value "1" from the credit counter (S103-3-7), and adds the value "1" to the bet number counter (S103-3-8). .

  After adding the numerical value "1" to the bet number counter, the main CPU 301 stores the input command in the command storage area (S103-3-9). After storing the closing command, the main CPU 301 sets a closing interval timer (S103-3-10). The closing interval timer is a timer for securing a time interval at which the closing command is transmitted to the sub control board 400 at a predetermined time length or more. Note that the insertion interval timer of the BET operation acceptance processing (S103-3-10) is also used in the above-mentioned automatic insertion processing. In the BET operation acceptance process (when the MAX-BET button is operated) and the automatic insertion process, the input command is continuously output, and the input sound is continuously reproduced. In the present embodiment, since the input interval timer is provided, the time interval at which each input command is transmitted is secured to be equal to or longer than a predetermined time length, and the period during which each input sound is output is equal to or longer than the predetermined time length. According to the above configuration, for example, immediately after the output of the current input sound is started, the next input sound is output (the current input sound becomes extremely short), and the current input sound is not detected by the player. Problems are suppressed. The insertion interval timer, for example, times up in about 0.5 seconds.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the insertion interval timer has timed out (S103-3-11). Step S103-3-11 is repeated until the closing interval timer times out (S103-3-11: NO), and when it is determined that the closing interval timer times out (S103-3-11: YES), the main CPU 301 It is determined whether the bet number counter matches the specified number (S103-3-12). When the main CPU 301 determines that the bet number counter matches the prescribed number (S 103-3-12: YES), it ends the BET operation acceptance process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bet number counter does not match the prescribed number (S103-3-12: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the input request counter is the numerical value "0" (S103-3). -13). When it is determined that the insertion request counter is the numerical value “0” (S103-3-13: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process. On the other hand, when determining that the input request counter is not the numerical value "0" (S103-3-13: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the number of credits is "0" (S103-3-14). ). If the main CPU 301 determines that the number of credits is "0" (S103-3-14: YES), it ends the BET operation acceptance processing, and if it is determined that the credit counter is not "0" (S103-3) -14: NO) Return the process to step S103-3-6.

  As understood from the above description, when the main CPU 301 receives an operation of the MAX-BET button 22, the bet number counter is added until the bet number counter reaches the specified number or the number of credits is exhausted.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the settlement operation reception process. In the settlement operation reception process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the settlement button 23 has been operated by the player (S103-4-1). If it is determined that the settlement button 23 has been operated (S103-4-1: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a settlement medal in the payout request counter (S103-4-2). The settlement medal is the sum of the bet number counter and the credit number when the settlement button 23 is operated. Further, the main CPU 301 stores the settlement operation command indicating the operation of the settlement button 23 in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S103-4-3), and sets the medal insertion impossible flag to the OFF state (S103-4-4). ).

  If it is determined that the settlement button 23 is not operated (S103-4-1: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the settlement operation reception process. Although details will be described later, in the hopper drive processing, the number of medals of the payout request counter is discharged from the hopper 520 to the tray unit 7 through the medal payout port 9.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the lottery execution process. When the main CPU 301 starts the lottery execution process, the main CPU 301 executes an internal lottery process (S106-1). In the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines the winning area of the current game from the random value R1. After executing the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 shifts to a rotating drum effect determination process (S106-2). In the turning drum effect determination process, the main CPU 301 determines the turning drum effect of the current game from the random value R2. After executing the spinning drum effect determination processing, the main CPU 301 shifts to AT determination processing (S106-3).

  In the AT determination process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to shift to the AT state from the random value R3. Specifically, in the AT determination process, the main CPU 301 acquires, from the AT determination table, a lottery value corresponding to the winning area and the turning drum effect of the current game, and subtracts the lottery value to a random value R3. In the normal state, when the result of subtracting the lottery value to the random number value R3 becomes a negative number, the main CPU 301 shifts the instruction state to the start preparation state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag indicating the instruction state from the normal state to the start preparation state. The instruction state flag is stored, for example, in the main RAM 303. The main CPU 301 transmits an instruction state command indicating the current instruction state flag to the sub CPU 412 in each game. When the result of subtracting the lottery value to the random number value R3 in the AT state is negative, the main CPU 301 adds the numerical value "1" to the AT stock counter. Further, the main CPU 301 stores a command indicating the result of the AT determination process of the current game in the command storage area. After executing the AT determination processing, the main CPU 301 shifts to instruction number determination processing (S106-4). In the instruction number determination process, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the internal lottery process. When the main CPU 301 starts the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 sets a winning area lottery table according to the gaming state (S106-1-1). For example, the main CPU 301 sets a winning area lottery table according to the RT flag indicating the type of RT state stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303.

  In the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 acquires the random number value R1 stored in the random number value R1 storage area (S106-1-2). The random number value R1 is stored in the random number value R1 storage area in step 105. Further, the main CPU 301 sets the winning area offset value to a numerical value "00" which is an initial value (S106-1-3). The winning area offset value designates each winning area. In addition, the winning area offset value is sequentially updated, and each time it is updated, a different winning area is designated. For example, the winning area offset value designates a winning area of "losing" with a numerical value "00".

  The main CPU 301 acquires the lottery value of the winning area specified by the winning area offset value (S106-1-4). For example, when the winning area lottery table in the RT0 state is set, if the winning area offset value is the numerical value "00", the lottery value "37042" is acquired.

  The main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value acquired in step S106-1-4 from the random number value R1 acquired in step S106-1-1 (S106-1-5). Further, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random number value R1 is a negative number (S106-1-6). For example, when the random number value R1 smaller than the numerical value "37042" is acquired in the game in the RT0 state, the result of subtracting the lottery value "37042" of the winning area number "00" from the random value R1 becomes a negative number. On the other hand, when a random number value R1 larger than the numerical value "37042" is acquired, the result of subtracting the lottery value of the winning area number "00" from the random value R1 does not become a negative number.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the subtraction result is not a negative number (S106-1-6: NO), whether or not all the winning areas (winning area numbers "00" to "32") are specified by the winning area offset value It is determined (S106-1-7). If all the winning areas have not been designated (S106-1-7: NO), the main CPU 301 updates the winning area offset value (adds the numerical value "1") (S106-1-8), and step S106- Return the process to 1-4. In step S106-4, the lottery value of the winning area specified by the updated winning area offset value is acquired, and in step S106-1-5, the lottery value is subtracted to the previous subtraction result. In the processing from step S106-1-4 to step S106-1-8, it is determined that the operation result is a negative number (S106-1.6: YES) or until all the winning areas are specified (S106-). 1-7: YES) It is repeated.

  When it is determined that the operation result is a negative number or when all the winning areas are designated, the main CPU 301 executes data storage processing (S106-1-9). Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the current winning area offset value in the winning area storage area of the main RAM 303. For example, when the winning area offset value for which the subtraction result has become a negative number is "12", the numerical value "12" is stored in the winning area storage area. Further, the main CPU 301 stores the first command corresponding to the winning area in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 in the data storage process. The main CPU 301 transmits the first command stored in the command storage area to the sub control board 400 in the command transmission process of the interrupt process described later.

  FIG. 43 is a flow chart of the spinning drum effect determination process. When the main CPU 301 starts the turning drum effect determination process, the main CPU 301 acquires various types of information used for determining the turning drum effect (S106-2-1). Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires various information including the instruction state of the current game, the winning area, and the random number value R2. After that, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the instruction state is a normal state or an end preparation state (S106-2-2).

  If it is determined that the instruction state is the normal state or the end preparation state (S 106-2-2: YES), the main CPU 301 determines the rotation drum effect of the current game by using the rotation drum effect determination table A (S 106 − 2-3). Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires each lottery value corresponding to the winning area of the current game from the rotating drum effect determination table A for each rotating drum effect, and sequentially subtracts each of the lottery values to the random value R2. . For example, the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value of each turn drum effect to the random value R2 in the order of “no effect”, turn drum effect A, turn drum effect B, turn drum effect C, and turn drum effect D. The main CPU 301 repeats the process until the result of subtracting the lottery value becomes a negative number, until the result of subtracting the lottery value to the random number value R2 becomes a negative number, and determines a rotating drum effect.

  If it is determined that the instruction state is not the normal state or the end preparation state (S 106-2-2: NO), that is, if it is in the AT state or the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 uses the rotating drum effect determination table B this time. The drum-turn effect of the game is determined (S106-2-4). After determining the rotating drum effect in step S106-2-3 or step S106-2-4, the main CPU 301 stores an effect type command indicating the rotating drum effect in the command storage area (S106-2-5). .

  After storing the effect type command, the main CPU 301 stores the rotating drum effect number of the rotating drum effect in the rotating drum effect number storage area (S106-2-6). Specifically, in the case of “no effect”, the numerical value “0” is stored in the rotating drum effect number storage area. Further, in the case of rotating drum effect A, the numerical value "1" is stored in the rotating drum effect number storage area, in the case of rotating drum effect B, the numerical value "2" is stored, and in the case of rotating drum effect C, the numerical value "3" Is stored, and in the case of the rotating drum effect D, the numerical value "4" is stored. After storing the spinning drum effect number, the main CPU 301 ends the spinning drum effect determination process.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart of instruction number determination processing. When the main CPU 301 starts the instruction number determination process, the main CPU 301 acquires the current instruction state (S106-4-2). After acquiring the instruction state, the main CPU 301 determines whether the instruction state is the normal state (SS 106-4-2). When determining that the instruction state is the normal state (S106-4-2: YES), the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using the instruction determination table A (S106-4-3). As described above, in the normal state, the instruction number "99" (no instruction) is determined in all the winning areas. On the other hand, when determining that the instruction state is not the normal state (S106-4-2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the instruction state is the AT in progress state or the start preparation state (S106-4-4). 4).

  If it is determined that the instruction state is the AT state or the start preparation state (S106-4-4: YES), the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using the instruction determination table B (S106-4-5). Specifically, the main CPU 301 indicates the instruction number "01" when the winning area of the current game is battling replay X1, the instruction number "02" if the batting replay is X2, and the instruction number "03" if the batting replay is X3. The instruction number "04" is determined in the batting replay X4, the instruction number "05" in the batting replay X5, and the instruction number "06" in the batting replay X6. Further, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "07" when the winning area of the current game is batting order replay Y1 or batting order bell L, and when the winning area is batting order replay Y2 or batting order bell C, the command number "08". If the winning area is batting order replay Y3 or batting order bell R, the instruction number "09" is decided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not the AT state or the start preparation state (S106-4-4: NO), that is, when the instruction state is the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 uses the instruction determination table C to issue an instruction. Determine the number. Specifically, when the current winning area is the batting order bell L, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "10" with a probability of 1/2 and determines the instruction number "11" with a probability of 1/2. Further, when the current winning area is the batting order bell C, the main CPU 301 determines the command number "10" with a probability of 1/2, determines the command number "12" with a probability of 1/2, and the batting bell R In this case, the instruction number "11" is determined with a probability of about 1/2, and the instruction number "12" is determined with a probability of about 1/2.

  After determining the instruction number in step S106-4-3 or step S106-4-5 or step S106-4-6, the main CPU 301 stores the instruction number in the instruction number storage area. The instruction number storage area is stored, for example, in the main RAM 303. The main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information corresponding to the instruction number stored in the instruction number storage area in the LED display processing of the interrupt processing described later. Further, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command indicating the instruction number stored in the instruction number storage area in the command transmission processing of the interrupt processing. After storing the instruction number, the main CPU 301 ends the instruction number determination process.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart of weight processing. The main CPU 301 executes the wait processing until the execution period of the spinning drum effect or the wait period elapses.

  When the weight processing is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotating drum effect number in the rotating drum effect number storage area is “0” (S107-1). That is, it is determined whether "no effect" is determined in the spinning drum effect determination process. If the spinning drum effect number is “0” (S107-1: YES), the main CPU 301 determines whether the weight timer is “0” (S107-2). The wait timer is decremented each time the interrupt processing is executed. If it is determined that the wait timer has not timed out (wait timer ≠ 0), the main CPU 301 repeats step S107-2 (S107-2: NO).

  On the other hand, when determining that the wait timer has timed out (S107-2: YES), the main CPU 301 newly sets the wait timer to an initial value (about 4100 ms) (S107-3). Further, the main CPU 301 stores a reel start command indicating that each reel 12 has been started in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S107-4), starts the rotation of each reel 12, and ends the weight processing.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the rotating drum effect number is other than “0” in step S107-1, the rotating drum effect number indicates “1” indicating the rotating drum effect A, or “the rotating drum effect B”. It is determined whether it is 2 "(S107-5). If it is determined that the spinning drum effect number is “1” or “2” (S107-5: YES), the main CPU 301 sets 1000 sm to the spinning drum effect timer (S107-6).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the spinning drum effect number is not "1" or "2" (S107-5: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the spinning drum effect number is "3" indicating the spinning drum effect C It is determined whether or not it is (S107-7). If it is determined that the spinning drum effect number is “3” (S107-7: YES), the main CPU 301 sets 2000 sm to the spinning drum effect timer (S107-8). On the other hand, when it is determined that the turning drum effect number is not "3" (S107-7: NO), that is, when the turning drum effect number is "4" indicating the turning drum effect D, the main CPU 301 turns the turn drum The 5000 timer is set in the effect timer (S107-9).

  After setting the rotating drum effect timer in step S107-6, step S107-8, and step S107-9, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotating drum effect timer has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S107-10). . The rotating drum effect timer is decremented each time the interrupt processing is executed. The main CPU 301 repeats step S107-10 (S107-10: NO) until the turn-up effect timer times up (that is, until the turn-up effect ends) (S107-10: NO), and determines that the time-out occurs (S107-10: YES), it transfers to step S107-2.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the pre-shutdown process. When the pre-shutdown process is started, the main CPU 301 sets an initial value to the acceleration wait timer (S108-1). The initial value of the acceleration weight timer is set to the length of time required for each reel 12 to accelerate to a steady rotation after starting. After setting the initial value to the acceleration weight timer, the main CPU 301 determines whether the acceleration weight timer has timed up (S108-2). The main CPU 301 repeats step S108-2 until the acceleration weight timer times up (S108-2: NO), and when the acceleration weight timer times up (S108-2: YES), shifts the processing to step S108-3. Do.

  In step S108-3, the main CPU 301 stores the numerical value "3" in the unstopped operation counter indicating the number of stop buttons 25 (25L, 25C, 25R) for which the stop operation has not been performed. Further, the main CPU 301 performs setting processing of the display combination storing area (S108-4). As described above, each displayable bit of the display combination storing area corresponds to each winning combination, and is a numerical value "1" when there is a possibility that the symbol combination relating to the corresponding winning combination may stop on the valid line. Therefore, in step S108-4 in which all the reels 12 are rotating, since all the symbol combinations relating to the winning combinations can be stopped on the effective line, all the bits of the display combination storing area are changed to the numerical value "1". It is set.

  After the setting processing of the display combination storing area, the main CPU 301 shifts to priority order storing processing (S108-5). FIG. 47 is a conceptual diagram of a plurality of priority storage areas P (PL, PC, PR) set in the priority storage processing. The priority storage area P is, as shown in FIG. 47, a left reel priority storage area PL corresponding to the reel 12L, a middle reel priority storage area PC corresponding to the reel 12C, and a right reel priority corresponding to the reel 12R. It is comprised including order storage area PR. Each priority storage area P is divided into a plurality of (21) areas Q. Each area Q corresponds to each symbol position (unit area U) of the reel 12.

  When the priority storage process is executed, the priority of the symbols of the area Q is stored in each area Q. For example, the priority "HFF" is stored in the area Q in which the winning combinations that have not been won are displayed when stopped on the active line. Further, the priority "H00" is stored in the area Q of the symbols that can be stopped on the activated line, and the numerical value "H01" is stored in the area Q of the symbols constituting the winning combination.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart of priority order storage processing. When the priority storage processing is started, the main CPU 301 stores the unstopped operation counter as the number of searches (S108-5-1). Further, the main CPU 301 determines one reel 12 among the reels 12 for which the stop operation has not been performed yet as the target reel (S108-5-2).

  The main CPU 301 executes priority order table selection processing (S108-5-3). The priority table defines the priority of each winning combination, and one of the plurality of priority tables is selected. For example, assume a game in which the winning area “bats order bell C1 to C4” (the first stop of the correct order of pressing is the reel 12C) is won. According to the priority table selected in the game, in the middle reel priority storage area PC, the priority of the "middle bell" symbol becomes higher than the priority of the "upper bell" symbol. On the other hand, in the left reel priority storage area PL and the right reel priority storage area PR, the priority of the "upper bell" symbol becomes higher than the priority of the "middle bell" symbol. According to the above configuration, by appropriately selecting the priority order table, the symbols stopped on the activated line change according to the stop operation order.

  After executing the priority order table selection processing, the main CPU 301 stores the initial value "00" in the area pointer, and stores the initial value "21" in the area remaining number (S108-5-4). The area pointer specifies the area Q of the target reel. Further, the number of remaining areas means the number of areas Q in which the priority is not stored in the target reel.

  The main CPU 301 acquires the symbol code (symbol type) of the symbol position designated by the area pointer (S108-5-5). Further, the main CPU 301 determines the priority according to the symbol code, the winning area (winning combination) and the priority table (S108-5-6). The main CPU 301 stores the determined priority in the area Q designated by the current area pointer (S108-5-7).

  The main CPU 301 adds the numerical value “1” to the area pointer, and subtracts the numerical value “1” from the area remaining number (S108-5-8). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 determines whether the area remaining number is the numerical value "0" (S108-5-9). If it is determined that the area remaining number is not “0” (S108-5-9: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes steps S108-5-5 to S108-5-9. On the other hand, when it is determined that the area remaining number is “0” (S108-5-9: YES), that is, when the generation of the priority order storage area of the target reel is completed, the main CPU 301 determines Subtract 1 "(S108-5-10).

  After subtracting the number of searches, the main CPU 301 determines whether the number of searches has ended (S108-5-11). If it is determined that the number of searches has not ended (S108-5-11: NO), the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S108-5-2, changes the target reel, and proceeds from step S108-5-2. Repeat steps S108-5-11. On the other hand, when determining that the number of searches has ended (S108-5-11: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the priority storage processing.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the stop control process. The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 has been operated (S109-1). The main CPU 301 repeatedly executes step S109-1 until the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 is operated (S109-1: NO). On the other hand, when the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 is operated (S109-1: YES), the main CPU 301 executes a stop operation command indicating the type of the stop button 25 subjected to the stop operation as a command of the main RAM 303. It stores in a storage area (S109-2).

  When the stop operation command is stored, the main CPU 301 updates the stop order storage area (S109-3). Further, the main CPU 301 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the unstopped operation counter (S109-4). The main CPU 301 sets the reel 12 corresponding to the operated stop button 25 as a stop target reel (S109-5).

  The main CPU 301 acquires the current value of the symbol counter (that is, the symbol number located on the middle line) as the stop operation position (S109-6). Among the areas Q of the priority order storage area of the target reel, the main CPU 301 prioritizes the area Q of the stop operation position and the area Q of four frames from the next frame of the stop operation position (that is, five frames). Priority) is acquired (S109-7). Further, the main CPU 301 determines the frame having the highest priority among the acquired priority for the five frames as the planned stop position, and sets the number of frames from the stop operation position to the planned stop position as the number of sliding frames ( S109-8).

  The main CPU 301 updates each bit of the display combination storing area according to the symbol code of the planned stop position (that is, the type of the symbol of the planned stop position) (S109-9). For example, when the reel 12L is stopped in the stop control process and the symbol "bell" is stopped on the activated line, the symbol combination relating to the winning combination (for example, the winning combination "middle cherry") whose symbol on the left reel is not "bell" is Since there is no possibility of stopping on the effective line, the bit corresponding to the winning combination among the bits of the display combination storing area becomes the numerical value "0".

  After updating the display combination storing area, the main CPU 301 determines whether the non-stop operation counter is "0" (S109-10). When the unstopped operation counter is the numerical value “0”, it means that the stop operation has been performed for all the reels 12. If it is determined that the unstopped operation counter is “0” (S109-10: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the stop control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the unstopped operation counter is not “0” (S109-10: NO), the priority storage processing executed in the pre-shut processing is executed (S109-11). In step S109-11, the priority is stored in the priority storage area P of the rotating reel 12 as in step S109-3 of the pre-stop process. However, even if it is the symbol which constitutes the winning combination indicated by the winning area of the winning area storage area, the symbol combination concerning the winning combination no longer having the possibility of being displayed on the activated line by stopping any reel 12 The symbol of is not set to a higher priority than the other symbols.

  After executing the priority storage processing, the main CPU 301 returns the processing to step S109-1. The main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step S109-1 to step 109-11 until the stop operation is performed on all the reels 12, that is, until it is determined that the non-stop operation counter is "0". Run. If it is determined that the unstopped operation counter is “0” (S109-10: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the reel stop control process.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the display determination process (S110). When the display determination process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the symbol combination relating to the winning combination stopped on the active line is the symbol combination relating to the winning combination permitted to stop on the active line in the game. (S110-1). Specifically, main CPU 301 permits display corresponding to the winning combination for the winning combination corresponding to the displayable bit set to “1” among the displayable bits of the display combination storing area in step S110-1. It is determined whether the bit is set to "1". When the display permission bit corresponding to the display enable bit of the numerical value “1” is set to “0”, the main CPU 301 determines that the illegal winning has occurred.

  If the main CPU 301 determines that an illegal prize has occurred (S110-1: YES), it stores an illegal prize command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S110-2), shifts to an illegal prize error process, Prohibit progress. When the incorrect winning error process is executed, for example, the power button 511 is turned off and then turned on again to cause the main CPU 301 to execute the activation process and the setting change process, and a normal setting value is set. It becomes possible to play games.

  When it is determined that the symbol combination related to the winning combination permitted to stop on the activated line is stopped (S110-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to replay is stopped on the activated line. It determines (S110-3). When it is determined that the replay is stopped at the symbol combination effective line according to (S110-3: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the replaying in progress flag to the ON state (S110-4), and replays command Are stored in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S110-5), and the display determination processing is ended. The replay command indicates that the symbol combination relating to replay has stopped on the activated line.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol combination relating to the replay is not stopped at the effective line (S110-3: NO), the main CPU 301 sets the replaying in-progress flag to the OFF state (S110-6). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination relating to the winning combination has stopped on the active line (S110-7). When it is determined that the symbol combination relating to the winning combination is stopped at the active line (S110-7: YES), the main CPU 301 stores the winning combination command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S110-8) . The winning combination winning combination command indicates the type of symbol combination pertaining to the winning combination winning combination aligned with the valid line.

  The main CPU 301 adds to the number of credits the medals of the number corresponding to the type of the symbol combination pertaining to the winning combination stopped in the active line (S110-9). After adding the number of credits, the main CPU 301 determines whether the result of the addition is larger than the numerical value "50" which is the upper limit value of the number of credits (S110-10). When the number of credits is larger than "50" (S110-10: YES), the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, when the addition result of step S110-9 is "55", the number "5" ") Is set in the medal request counter (S110-11). After setting the number of medals in the medal request counter, the main CPU 301 shifts to hopper driving processing. On the other hand, when the number of credits is “50” or less (S110-10: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the display determination process.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol combination relating to the winning combination is not stopped at the active line in step S110-7 (S110-7: NO), the main CPU 301 stores the lost display command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S110-12). The loss display command indicates that the symbol combination relating to the winning combination is not stopped on the activated line. In the present embodiment, the replay command, the winning combination command and the lost display command are collectively referred to as a display winning combination command.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart of hopper drive processing. The hopper drive process is executed when the payout request counter is set in the display determination process or the settlement operation acceptance process of the pre-game start process. When the hopper drive processing is started, the main CPU 301 stores a payout start command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S120). The payout start command indicates the start of medal discharge in the hopper 520. Further, the main CPU 301 sets an initial value to the payout period monitoring timer (S121). The payout period monitoring timer is timed up when a predetermined time length (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper drive processing was started.

  The main CPU 301 starts output of the hopper drive signal (S122). The medals are sequentially discharged from the hopper 520 during a period in which the hopper drive signal is output. After starting the output of the hopper drive signal, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout period monitoring timer has timed up (S123). When the main CPU 301 determines that the payout period monitoring timer has timed out (S123: YES), the main CPU 301 stores an error command in the command storage area (S124), and shifts to hopper empty error processing. The main CPU 301 shifts to the hopper empty error processing and prohibits the progress of the game when the discharge of the number of medals of the payout request counter is not completed until the payout period monitoring timer is up after the start of the hopper driving processing. Do. When the hopper empty error processing is executed, for example, when the hopper 520 is replenished with a medal and the reset button 512 is operated, the progress of the game is permitted.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether a payout signal from the hopper 520 has been detected (S125). As described above, the payout signal is output from the payout sensor 112SE each time one medal is dispensed from the hopper 520. The main CPU 301 repeatedly executes step S125 until determining that the payout signal is detected (S125: NO).

  When the main CPU 301 determines that a payout signal is detected (S125: YES), the payout request counter is decremented by 1 (S126). After that, the main CPU 301 determines whether the payout request counter has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S127). If it is determined that the payout request counter has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S127: YES), the main CPU 301 stops the output of the hopper drive signal (S128), and stores the payout end command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303. (S129). For example, the sub control board 400 starts outputting a sound effect of payout when receiving a payout start command from the main CPU 301, and stops outputting a sound effect of payout when receiving a payout end command. When the main CPU 301 stores the payout end command, the main CPU 301 ends the hopper drive processing. On the other hand, when determining that the payout request counter is not “0” (S127: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes steps S123 to S127.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the gaming state transition process. When the gaming state transition process is started, the main CPU 301 executes an RT state transition process (S111-1). In the RT state transition processing, the main CPU 301 transitions the RT state. After the RT state transition process, the main CPU 301 executes a bonus state transition process (S111-2). In the bonus state transition process, the main CPU 301 ends or starts the bonus operation state. After the bonus state transition process, the main CPU 301 executes an instruction state transition process (S111-3). In the instruction state transition process, the main CPU 301 shifts the instruction state.

  FIG. 53 (a) is a flowchart of RT state transition processing. When the main CPU 301 starts the RT state transition process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the RT1 transition symbol has stopped on the activated line (S111-1-1). As described above, when the winning combination "upper bell" is missed, the RT1 transition symbol stops on the effective line. If it is determined that the RT1 transition symbol has been stopped on the activated line (S111-1-1: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the RT1 state (S111-1-2). Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the RT flag stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating “RT1”. In addition, if the RT1 transition symbol is stopped on the effective line in the RT1 state, the RT state is not changed. After changing the RT flag, the main CPU 301 ends the RT state transition processing.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the RT1 transition symbol has not stopped at the effective line (S111-1-1: NO), it determines whether the RT2 transition symbol has stopped at the effective line (S111-1-3) ). If it is determined that the RT2 transition symbol has stopped on the activated line (S111-1-3: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the RT state to the RT2 state (S111-1-4). Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the RT flag stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating “RT2”. After changing the RT flag, the main CPU 301 ends the RT state transition processing.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the RT2 transition symbol has not stopped at the effective line (S111-1-3: NO), it determines whether the RT3 transition symbol has stopped at the effective line (S111-1-5) ). If it is determined that the RT3 transition symbol has stopped on the activated line (S111-1-5: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the RT state to the RT3 state (S111-1-6). Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the RT flag stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating “RT3”. After changing the RT flag, the main CPU 301 ends the RT state transition processing.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the RT3 transition symbol is not stopped at the activated line (S111-1-5: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the termination condition of the bonus operation state is satisfied in the current game (S111) 1-7). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the total number of medals paid out in the bonus activated state has reached 297. When the main CPU 301 determines that the ending condition of the bonus operation state is not satisfied (S111-1-7: YES), the gaming state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, when determining that the termination condition of the bonus operation state is satisfied (S111-1-7: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the RT state to the RT0 state (S111-1-8). Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the RT flag stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating “RT0”. After changing the RT flag, the main CPU 301 ends the RT state transition processing.

  FIG. 53 (b) is a flowchart of bonus state transition processing. When the bonus state transition process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the symbol combination relating to the bonus combination is stopped on the activated line (S111-2-1). If it is determined that the symbol combination relating to the bonus combination has been stopped on the activated line (S111-2-1: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the bonus operating state (S111-2-2). Specifically, the main CPU 301 turns on the bonus operation flag stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 303. After changing the bonus operation flag to the ON state, the main CPU 301 ends the bonus state transition process.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol combination relating to the bonus combination is not stopped on the activated line (S111-2-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the ending condition of the bonus operating state is satisfied in the current game. (S111-2-3). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the total number of medals paid out in the bonus activated state has reached 297. When the main CPU 301 determines that the termination condition of the bonus operation state is not satisfied (S111-2-3: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the bonus state transition processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the termination condition of the bonus operation state is satisfied (S111-2-3: YES), the main CPU 301 turns the bonus operation flag OFF (S111-2-4), and then the bonus state Finish the migration process.

  FIG. 53C is a flowchart of the instruction state transition process. When the main CPU 301 starts instruction state transition processing, the main CPU 301 determines whether the current instruction state is the normal state (S111-3-1). If it is determined that the game is in the normal state (S111-3-1: YES), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the AT state is won in the current game (S111-3-2). If it is determined that the AT state has not been won (S111-3-2: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the instruction state transition process. On the other hand, when determining that the AT state has been won (S111-3-2: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating the start preparation state (S111-3-3). In the above configuration, when the AT state is won in the normal state, the transition to the start preparation state is made.

  When it is determined that the instruction state is not the normal state (S111-3-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the instruction state is the start preparation state (S111-3-4). When the main CPU 301 determines that it is in the start preparation state (S111-3-4: YES), it determines whether or not it has shifted to the RT3 state in the current game (S111-3-5). If it is determined that the state has not shifted to the RT3 state (S111-3-5: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the instruction state shift process. On the other hand, when determining that the state has shifted to the RT3 state (S111-3-5: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag to a value indicating the AT-in-state (S111-3-6). In the above configuration, when transitioning to the RT3 state in the start preparation state, the transition to the AT-in-progress state is made.

  If it is determined that the instruction state is not the start preparation state (S111-3-4: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the instruction state is the AT state (S111-3-7). When the main CPU 301 determines that the AT is in progress (S111-3-7: YES), the main CPU 301 determines whether the AT counter has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S111-3-8). When determining that the AT counter is not the numerical value “0” (S111-3-8: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the instruction state transition process. On the other hand, when determining that the AT counter is the numerical value "0" (S111-3-8: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag to a value indicating the end preparation state (S111-3-9). In the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the AT state (AT counter) is reduced to the numerical value "0", the state shifts to the end preparation state.

  If it is determined that the instruction state is not the AT state (S111-3-7: NO), that is, in the case of the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it has shifted to the RT1 state in the current game ( S111-3-10). If it is determined that the state has not shifted to the RT1 state (S111-3-10: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the command state shift process without shifting the command state. On the other hand, when determining that the state has shifted to the RT1 state (S111-3-10: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag to a value indicating a normal state. In the above configuration, when transitioning to the RT1 state in the end preparation state (when the upper and middle bells are dropped), the transition to the normal state is made.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the interrupt process. As described above, the main CPU 301 executes interrupt processing every 1.49 ms while the game control processing is being executed.

  When the main CPU 301 starts interrupt processing, it saves data of various registers (S201). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 executes an input port reading process (S202). In the input port reading process, the main CPU 301 reads various signals input to the I / F circuit 305. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads ON signals of the start switch 24SW, the stop switches 25SW, the medal sensor 34SE, the settlement switch 23SW, etc. in the input port reading process. The main CPU 301 sets detection flags of the sensor and the switch from which the ON signal is read to the ON state.

  The main CPU 301 executes timer measurement processing (S203). In the timer measurement process, the main CPU 301 subtracts a predetermined value from various timers. In the timer measurement process, the main CPU 301 subtracts, for example, a payout period monitoring timer set in the hopper drive process, and a rotating drum effect timer and a weight timer set in the weight process.

  The main CPU 301 selects a drive target reel from the rotating reels (S204), and executes drive control processing (S205) of the drive target reel. In drive control processing, the main CPU 301 outputs drive pulses to the stepping motor of the drive target reel. When the drive pulse is input, the excitation pattern of the stepping motor is switched.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether drive control processing for all the reels 12 has been executed (S206). When it is determined that the drive control process of all the reels 12 is not executed (S206: NO), the main CPU 301 repeats step S204 and step S205. On the other hand, when it is determined that the drive control processing of all the reels 12 has been executed (S206: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the external signal output processing (S207).

  The main CPU 301 outputs a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine 1 in the external signal output process. For example, when the setting change process is started, the main CPU 301 outputs a signal indicating the start of the setting change process to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

 The main CPU 301 drives various lamps in the LED display process (S208). For example, the main CPU 301 displays the BET lamp 14 in a mode indicated by BET lamp display data generated in the game control process. Further, the main CPU 301 turns on the replaying indicator lamp 18 in the LED display processing when the replaying in progress flag is set to the ON state. In addition, the main CPU 301 causes the number-of-credits display 17 to display the number of credits in the LED display process. Furthermore, in the LED display processing, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information corresponding to the instruction number determined in the instruction number determination processing.

  After the LED display processing, the main CPU 301 shifts to command transmission processing (S209). As described above, various commands are stored in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 in the game control process. The command stored in the command storage area is transmitted to the sub control board 400 in the command transmission process.

  After the command transmission process, the main CPU 301 executes a register recovery process (S210), and restores the data saved in step S210 to the register. When the register return process is executed, the main CPU 301 causes the process to return to step S of the game control process that was being executed when the interrupt process was started.

<Each process executed by sub CPU>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the sub activation process of the sub CPU 412. The sub CPU 412 executes the sub activation process when the reset signal from the reset circuit is input. The reset circuit outputs a reset signal when the power supply voltage supplied to the sub control board 400 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when the supply of the power supply voltage to the sub control substrate 400 is started, the sub activation process is performed.

  When the sub activation process is started, the sub CPU 412 executes an initialization process (S301) upon activation. In the startup initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 412 initializes various registers of the sub control board 400.

  In the startup initialization process, the sub CPU 412 determines the presence or absence of a backup abnormality in the sub RAM 414. If there is a backup error, the sub CPU 412 initializes backup data. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the data stored in the various ROMs including the CGROM 424 is appropriate in the initialization processing at startup. For example, data stored at a specific address of each ROM is read, and it is determined whether the data is appropriate. If an abnormality is found in various ROMs, the sub CPU 412 shifts to predetermined error processing.

  In the sub activation process, the sub CPU 412 activates the lamp control task (S302), the acoustic control task (S303), the image control board communication task (S304), the main control board communication task (S305), and effects The button input task is activated (S306).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart of each task activated in the sub activation process. The sub CPU 412 controls various lamps including the casing lamp 5 and the effect lamp 28 by the lamp control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 controls the speakers (31, 32) by the sound control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 transmits a command to the image control board 420 by the image control board communication task, receives a command from the main control board 300 in the main control board communication task, and effects button 26 and direction in the effect button input task The operation of the designation button 27 is accepted.

  A timer interrupt signal is input to the sub CPU 412 at a predetermined time interval. When the sub CPU 412 receives the timer interrupt signal, it executes any one of the tasks. That is, each peripheral device including various lamps and speakers (31, 32) is controlled in time division.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a flowchart of the lamp control task. When the sub CPU 412 starts the lamp control task, it initializes data for controlling various lamps (S302-1). When various data are initialized, the sub CPU 412 shifts to a lamp data analysis process (S302-2). The lamp data is data indicating a blinking pattern of various lamps. For example, a time series of data indicating time for turning on a specific lamp and data indicating time for turning off may be adopted as lamp data (300 ms on → 300 ms off → 300 ms on →...).

  The sub CPU 412 blinks a specific lamp in a mode specified by the lamp data in the lamp control process (S302-3). The lamp data analysis process and the lamp effect execution process are repeatedly performed until the timer interrupt signal is input.

  FIG. 56 (b) is a flowchart of the sound control task. When the sub CPU 412 starts the sound control task, it initializes various data for controlling the speakers (31, 32) (S303-1). After initializing the various data, the sub CPU 412 shifts to acoustic data analysis processing (S303-2).

  In the sound control process (S303-3), the sub CPU 412 instructs the sound substrate 430 (sound source IC 431) according to the result of the sound data analysis process. The sound source IC 431 reads sound data from the sound source ROM 432 in response to an instruction from the sub CPU 412, generates sound signals from the sound data, and supplies the sound signals to the speakers (31, 32). The acoustic data analysis process and the acoustic control process are repeatedly performed until the timer interrupt signal is input.

  FIG. 56C is a flowchart of the image control board communication process. When the sub CPU 412 starts the image control board communication task, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the non-playing timer has timed out (S304-1). The non-playing timer is timed up when the non-playing state continues for a predetermined time after the previous game is over. Specifically, the non-playing timer is set to an initial value when the previous game is over, and is decremented at predetermined intervals in the non-playing period. For example, the non-game timer is timed up when the non-game period continues for one minute after the previous game is over. The non-play timer is provided, for example, in the sub RAM 414.

  If the sub CPU 412 determines that the non-playing timer has timed out (S304-1: YES), it proceeds to a demonstration display command transmission process (S304-2), and transmits a demonstration display command to the image control board 420. When receiving the demonstration display command, the image control board (image control CPU 421) 420 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display a demonstration image. Further, the sub CPU 412 turns off various lamps in a period in which the demonstration image is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the non-game timer has not timed out (S304-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 sets a command according to the effect number stored in the sub RAM 414 (S304-3). The effect number indicates the type of effect to be executed in the gaming machine 1 and is stored in the effect number storage area of the sub RAM 414 in the effect lottery process described later. The sub CPU 447 transmits the command set in step S304-3 to the image control board 420 (S304-4), and ends the image control board communication task. In the image control board communication task, a command from the image control board 420 may be received.

  FIG. 56 (d) is a flowchart of the main control board communication task. When the main control board communication task is started, the sub CPU 412 executes communication start pre-processing (S305-1) for initializing a predetermined storage area. After executing the communication start pre-processing, the sub CPU 412 shifts to reception command check processing (S305-2). In the reception command check process, the content of the command received from the main control board 300 is checked.

  The sub CPU 412 determines whether the command checked in the current reception command check process is different from the command checked in the previous reception command check process (S305-3). That is, in step S305-3, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the command from the main control board 300 has changed. The sub CPU 412 repeatedly executes step S305-3 until the command from the main control board 300 changes (S305-3: NO). When the command from the main control board 300 changes (S305-3: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts to command analysis processing (S305-4).

  After executing the command analysis process, the sub CPU 412 executes a game information update process (S305-5). In the game information update process, the sub CPU 412 updates the game information stored in the sub RAM 414 in accordance with the command received from the main control board 300. The sub CPU 412 executes one of a plurality of types of game information update processing in step S305-5. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 executes game information update processing according to the type of command received from the main control board 300 among the plurality of types of game information update processing. For example, when the sub CPU 412 receives the start operation command, the sub CPU 412 executes a game information update process for updating the number of remaining games in the AT state displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. After updating the game information, the sub CPU 412 returns the process to step S305-2, and repeats the process from step S305-2 to step S305-5 until the next timer interrupt signal is input.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart of command analysis processing. The sub CPU 412 executes the effect control process (S401) when the command analysis process is started. As described later, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect to be executed by the gaming machine 1 in the effect control process, for example.

  After executing the effect control process, the sub CPU 412 determines lamp data according to the effect (S402), and stores the lamp data in the sub RAM 414 (S403). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines sound data in accordance with the effect determined in the effect control process (S404), and stores the determined sound data in the sub RAM 414 (S405). When the acoustic data is stored, the sub CPU 412 ends the command analysis process.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart of effect control processing. When the sub CPU 412 starts the effect control process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the command received from the main control board 300 is a setting change start command or a setting value command (S401-1). If it is determined that the command received from the main control board 300 is a setting change start command or a setting value command (S401-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts to setting change start / end processing (S401-2).

  Specifically, when it is determined that the setting change start command has been received, the sub CPU 412 notifies that the setting change process is being executed. For example, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display a message “setting is being changed”, and causes each speaker to output the sound of the message. When it is determined that the setting value command has been received (that is, when the setting change process ends), the sub CPU 412 stores the setting value indicated by the setting value command in the sub RAM 414 and ends notification of the setting change process. Do. After executing the setting change start / end process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  If it is determined that the command received from main control board 300 is not the setting change start command or the setting value command (S401-1: NO), sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the input command is received (S401-3 ). If it is determined that the input command has been received (S401-3: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts to an input command reception process (S401-4). In the input command reception time process, for example, the sub CPU 412 generates an effect when a medal is inserted. After executing the input command reception process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not an input command (S401-3: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a settlement operation command has been received (S401-5). If it is determined that the settlement operation command has been received (S401-5: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to processing when the settlement operation command is received (S401-6). In the settlement operation command reception process, the sub CPU 412 notifies that the medal settlement is being performed. The sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display, for example, a message that "the settlement is in progress" in the process of receiving the settlement operation command, and outputs a predetermined warning sound from the speaker. After executing the settlement operation command reception process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not a settlement operation command (S401-5: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a start operation command has been received (S401-7). If it is determined that the start operation command has been received (S401-7: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts to start operation processing (S401-8). In the start operation process, the sub CPU 412 executes various processes including the effect lottery process. After executing the start operation process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not the start operation command (S401-7: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a reel start command has been received (S401-9). If it is determined that the reel start command has been received (S401-9: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts to the reel start command reception process (S401-10). In the reel start command reception process, for example, the sub CPU 412 causes the speaker to output a reel rotation sound that is output when the rotation of the reel is started. After executing the reel start command reception process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not a reel start command (S401-9: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a stop operation command has been received (S401-11). If it is determined that the stop operation command has been received (S401-11: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts to the stop operation process (S401-12). In the stop operation process, for example, the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 30 is switched. After executing the stop operation process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not the stop operation reception command (S401-11: NO), whether or not the display winning combination command (replay command, winning combination winning combination command or lost display command) is received (S401-13). If it is determined that the display winning combination command has been received (S401-13: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts to processing upon reception of the display winning combination command (S401-14).

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not the display winning combination command (S401-13: NO), it determines whether or not the payout start command or the payout end command has been received (S401-15). If it is determined that the payout start command or the payout end command has been received (S401-15: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a payout sound control process (S401-16). For example, when the sub CPU 412 receives a payout start command, the sub CPU 412 starts output of a medal payout sound for notifying discharge of a medal. When the payout end command is received, the sub CPU 412 stops the medal payout sound. After executing the payout sound control process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  FIG. 59 (a) is a flowchart of the start operation process. When the start operation process is started, the sub CPU 412 executes an effect lottery process (S501). In the effect lottery process, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect on the effect lottery table. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 acquires the lottery value of each effect from the effect lottery table according to the winning area (first command), and subtracts the lottery value to the random value R4. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect in which the result of subtraction of the random value R4 has become a negative number. After the effect lottery process, the sub CPU 412 shifts to an instruction effect determination process (S502). In the instruction effect determination process, the sub CPU 412 determines instruction effects (A to E).

  The sub CPU 412 stores, in the command storage area of the sub RAM 414, the rendering command corresponding to the rendering determined in the rendering process of the current start operation processing and the rendering determined in the rendering for instruction processing after the rendering processing for the instruction start. (S503). When the image control CPU 421 receives the effect command, the image control CPU 421 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute both the effect specified by the effect command and the instruction effect in parallel. In the case described above, both the instruction icon image S (X, Y, Z, A, B) of the instruction effect described above and the image of the other effect are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in parallel.

  FIG. 59 (b) is a flowchart of an instruction effect determination process. When the instruction effect determination process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the instruction state is the at-AT state or the start preparation state (S502-1). When it is judged that it is in AT state or start preparation state (S502-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the first command of the current game is "A04" (Sequence bell) (S502 -2). If it is determined that the command is "A04" (S502-2: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts to bell instruction effect selection processing (S502-3). In the above configuration, the bell instruction effect selection process is shifted when the batting bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. The sub CPU 412 ends the instruction effect determination process after the bell instruction effect selection process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the player is not in the AT state or ready to start (S502-1: NO), or when it is determined that the first command of the current game is not "A04" (S502-2: NO), The sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect according to the first command and the second command. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect according to the instruction effect determination table (A, C) according to the instruction state. For example, when the first command is "A01" (strike order replay) and the second command is "B01", and the instruction state is the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction effect determination table A indicates the instruction effect A1. Is determined. In the present embodiment, when the second command is "B99" (no instruction), the instruction effect is not determined. The sub CPU 412 ends the instruction effect determination process after determining the instruction effect.

  FIG. 59C is a flowchart of the bell instruction effect selection process. As described above, when the batting bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the sub CPU 412 executes the bell instruction effect selection process. When the bell instruction effect selection process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the AT state has been won in the current game (S502-3-1).

  When determining that the AT state has been won (S502-3-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 selects the instruction effect C with a probability of about 9/10 and selects the instruction effect D with a probability of about 1/10 (S502) -3- 2). On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT state is not won (S502-3-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 selects the instruction effect C with a probability of about 99/100, and the instruction effect D with a probability of about 1/100. It chooses (S502-3-3). In the above configuration, in the game in which the batting bell in the AT state or the start preparation state is won, the instruction effect D is more easily selected when the AT state is won than when the AT state is not won. Therefore, by the instruction effect D, an AT state winning chance is notified. As described above, the bell instruction effect selection process is executed in the AT state (in-AT state, start preparation state), and the AT stock counter is added when the AT determination process is won in the AT state. Therefore, it is also stated that the indication effect D announces a chance that the right to shift to the AT state is stocked. After selecting the instruction effect, the sub CPU 412 ends the bell instruction effect selection process.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment of the present invention will be described below. In addition, in each form illustrated below, about the element in which an operation | movement and a function are equivalent to 1st Embodiment, the code | symbol referred by description of 1st Embodiment is diverted and detailed description of each is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  In the first embodiment described above, instruction information corresponding to the stop operation order is displayed on the instruction display 16, and the player is instructed of the stop operation order. The following second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the instruction information corresponding to the winning area is displayed on the instruction display 16 and the player is instructed to stop operation.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram for describing instruction information of the second embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information in each game of the start preparation state and the AT state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information corresponding to the winning area of the current game. As instruction information corresponding to the winning area, a winning area number (see FIG. 9) indicating the winning area may be employed. For example, the winning area number of batting order replay X1 is the numerical value "01". The instruction information of the present embodiment corresponds to the winning area. Also, the winning area (for example, batting order replay X1) corresponds to one or more winning combinations (for example, normal replay and RT2 transition replay) (see FIG. 10). Therefore, it can be said that the instruction information corresponds to the winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the batting order replay X1 is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the indication display 16 to display indication information “01”. According to the above configuration, the player is notified of the winning of the batting order replay X1 by the instruction information. That is, in the second embodiment, the type of batting order replay X (1 to 6) won in the current game is notified by the instruction information. As described above, when the batting replay X1 is won, the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay is the stop operation order of “left middle right”. Therefore, when the instruction information “01” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation in the operation order of “left middle right”. As understood from the above description, displaying the instruction information “01” indicating the winning area number substantially instructs the stop operation order “left middle right”.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the batting order replay X2 (winning area number "02") is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the indication display 16 to indicate indication information "02". Display. According to the above configuration, the correct pressing order "right and left middle" of the RT2 transition replay when the batting replay X2 is won is instructed. In addition, when the batting order replay X3 (winning area number "03") is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the instruction information "03" is displayed on the indication display 16, and the batting order replay X3 is won The correct pushing order "middle left and right" of the RT2 transition replay in the case is instructed. Similarly, when batting order replay X4 (winning area number "04") is won in each game in start preparation state or in AT state, instruction information "04" is displayed on indication indicator 16, and batting order replay X4 is won. If the correct order of the RT2 transition replay in case of being played "middle right left" is instructed and batting order replay X5 (winning area number "05") is won, the indication information "05" is displayed on the indication display 16 and batting order replay When X5 wins, RT2 transition replay correct order "right-left middle" is instructed, and when batting order replay X6 (winning area number "06") is won, indication information "06" is displayed on indication indicator 16 When the batting replay X6 is won, the right pushing order "right middle left" of the RT2 transition replay is instructed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when a batting order replay Y1 (winning area number "07") is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the indication display 16 to indicate indication information "07". Display. In addition, when batting order replay Y2 (winning area number "08") is won in each game in start preparation state or in AT state, instruction information "08" is displayed on indication indicator 16, and batting order replay Y2 (winning area) When the number "09" is won, the instruction information "09" is displayed on the instruction display 16. According to the above configuration, the type of the batting order replay Y (1 to 3) won in the current game is informed by the instruction information. When the instruction information “07” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation in the right order “first left stop” of the replay on RT3 transition replay when the batting replay Y 1 is won. In addition, when the instruction information “08” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation at the correct answer order “midway first stop” of the RT3 transition replay when the batting replay Y2 is won, and the instruction information “09” is displayed. If it is determined that the batting order replay Y3 is won, the stop operation is performed with the correct pressing order “right first stop” of the RT3 transition replay. That is, by displaying the instruction information “07” to “09” on the instruction indicator 16, each correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay of the batting order replay Y (1 to 3) is instructed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the bat order bell L1 (winning area number "12") is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the instruction information "12" is displayed on the instruction display 16. The correct order for the middle bell when the batting bell L1 is won is the left first stop. Therefore, when the instruction information "12" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation at the left first stop. Further, when the batting order bell L2 (the winning area number “13”) is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the indication information “13” is displayed on the indication display 16. The correct order for the middle bell when the batting bell L2 is won is the left first stop, as in the case where the batting bell L1 is won. Therefore, when the instruction information "13" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation at the left first stop. Furthermore, when the batting order bell L3 (winning area number "14") is won, the instruction information "14" is displayed on the indication display 16, and when the batting order bell L4 (winning area number "15") is won, the instruction information “15” is displayed on the indicator 16. Since both the correct order of the middle bell when the batting bell L3 is won and the correct order of the middle bell when the batting bell L4 is won are the left first stop, the instruction information “14” or the instruction When the information “15” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation at the left first stop. As understood from the above description, each of the instruction information “12” to “15” indicates the stop operation order of the left first stop.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the bat order bell C1 (winning area number “16”) is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the indication information “16” is displayed on the indication display 16. In addition, when the batting order bell C2 (winning area number "17") is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the instruction information "17" is displayed, and the batting order bell C3 (winning area number "18") If the player wins, the instruction information "18" is displayed, and if the batting order bell C4 (winning area number "19") is won, the instruction information "19" is displayed. When the batting order bell C1, the batting order bell C2, the batting order bell C3 or the batting order bell C4 is won, the correct order for the middle bell is middle first stop. Therefore, when any one of the instruction information “16” to “19” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation at the first stop during the middle. That is, each of the instruction information "16" to "19" indicates the stop operation order of the middle first stop.

  Similarly, when the batting bell R1 (the winning area number "20") is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the instruction information "20" is displayed on the indication display 16, and the batting bell R2 (winning When the area number "21" is won, the instruction information "21" is displayed, and when the bat order bell R3 (winning area number "22") is won, the instruction information "22" is displayed and the bat order bell R4 (winning) When the area number "23" is won, the instruction information "23" is displayed. When the batting bell R1, the batting bell R2, the batting bell R3 or the batting bell R4 is won, the correct pushing order of the middle bell is the first right stop. Therefore, when any one of the instruction information "20" to "23" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation at the first right stop. That is, each of the instruction information “20” to “23” instructs the stop operation order of the right first stop. Also in the second embodiment described above, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be obtained.

Third Embodiment
FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are time charts for explaining the display at each time of the indication display 16 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, when the batting bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction information of the instruction display 16 indicates the correct pushing order of the middle bell. . Further, in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the winning area number is displayed on the instruction display 16 as instruction information (see FIG. 60).

  FIG. 61 (a) shows a specific example when the batting bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. As shown in FIG. 61A, when the batting order bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the winning area number "12" of the batting order bell L1 is displayed on the indication display 16 as indication information. In the above case, since the correct order of the batting order bell L1 is the left first stop, the player performs the stop operation at the left first stop. In the specific example of FIG. 61A, it is assumed that the batting bell L1 is won and the stop operation is performed at the left first stop. In the above case, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Further, the instruction display 16 continuously displays the instruction information “12” until the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line. When the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the indication display 16 sequentially displays the numbers “0” to “9” (the number of middle bell dispensed) as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 61 (b) is a specific example when the batting bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, as in FIG. 61 (a). However, the specific example of the above-mentioned FIG. 61 (a) assumes the case where the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (left first stop), whereas the specific example of FIG. 61 (b) It is assumed that the stop operation is performed at (middle first stop, right first stop).

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the batting order bell L 1 is won, the instruction information “12” is displayed on the instruction display 16. Thereafter, when the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 25L, the display of the instruction information ends immediately after the first stop operation. Although illustration is omitted, in the case where instruction information other than the instruction information “12” in FIG. 61B is displayed and the stop operation is performed outside the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information, Similar to the specific example of FIG. 61 (b), the indication display 16 ends the display of indication information.

  As described above, the main CPU 301 according to the third embodiment operates the stop button 25 except for the operation mode instructed by the instruction information, when the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information (stop operation error). If it is, the display of the instruction information displayed on the instruction display 16 is ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 turns off all the segments of the instruction display 16 when the player makes a mistake in the stop operation. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the instruction display unit 16 is maintained in the non-display state until the symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed after making a stop operation mistake. Thereafter, when the symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts of the current game is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  In the above third embodiment, the same effect as that of the second embodiment can be obtained. In addition, in the third embodiment, when a stop operation mistake is made, the display of the instruction display 16 ends. According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize the stop operation mistake by ending the display of the instruction display 16. It is assumed that information indicating notification of a stop operation error (for example, operation error information in the first embodiment) is displayed on the instruction display 16. In the above configuration, it is necessary to store lamp data for displaying information notifying a stop operation error in the sub ROM 413 or the like. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the stop operation mistake is made, the display of the indication display 16 is ended, and the lamp data described above need not be stored. Therefore, according to the third embodiment, there is an advantage that the capacity of the lamp data is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the information for reporting the stop operation mistake is displayed.

Fourth Embodiment
FIG. 62A and FIG. 62B are time charts for explaining the display at each time of the instruction display 16 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, when the batting bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction information of the instruction display 16 indicates the correct push order of the middle bell. . Further, in the fourth embodiment, the winning area number is displayed on the instruction display 16 as instruction information (see FIG. 60), as in the above-described third and second embodiments.

  FIG. 62 (a) shows a specific example when the batting bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when the batting order bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the winning area number "12" of the batting order bell L1 is displayed on the indication display 16 as indication information. In the specific example of FIG. 62 (a), it is assumed that the batting bell L1 is won and the stop operation is performed at the left first stop. In the above case, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Further, the instruction display 16 continuously displays the instruction information “12” until the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  FIG. 62 (b) is a specific example in which the batting bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, as in FIG. 62 (a). However, while the specific example of the above-mentioned FIG. 62 (a) assumes the case where the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (left first stop), the specific example of FIG. 62 (b) is the lost push order. It is assumed that the stop operation is performed at (middle first stop, right first stop).

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the batting order bell L 1 is won, the instruction information “12” is displayed on the instruction display 16. Thereafter, even when the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 25L, the instruction information "12" is continuously displayed. Although illustration is omitted, even when the instruction information other than the instruction information “12” in FIG. 62 (b) is displayed, even if the stop operation is performed other than the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information. Similarly to the specific example of FIG. 62 (b), the indication display 16 continues the display of indication information. As described above, when the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information, the main CPU 301 according to the fourth embodiment may operate the stop button 25 other than the operation mode indicated by the instruction information. The display of the instruction information displayed by the instruction display 16 is continued. Thereafter, when the symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts of the current game is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  By the way, even in the game where the batting bell is won, even if the first stop operation is performed in a pressing order, the upper bell is displayed on the effective line according to the stop operation position of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. It is possible. As described in detail below, the stop operation position where the upper bell can be pulled in differs depending on the type of upper bell (upper bell 1 to upper bell 8) (the lead-in range is different for each upper bell). In addition, when the winning area number is displayed, the player may be able to identify the type of the upper bell in which the middle bell and the upper bell are selected in addition to the correct bell pressing order. That is, in the configuration in which the winning area number is displayed, the stop operation position to which the upper bell can be pulled in is notified in addition to the order of correctly pressing the middle bell.

  62 (c-1) to 62 (c-4) are diagrams for explaining the stop operation position for stopping and displaying the upper bell. FIGS. 62 (c-1) to 62 (c-4) assume that the batting order bell L1 is won, and it is assumed that the stopping operation is performed in the lost push order. When the batting order bell L1 is won, the upper bell 1 and the upper bell 4 are won in addition to the middle bell (see FIG. 10). Therefore, in the game in which the batting bell L1 is won, the upper bell 1 “Replay X-Plum-Plum” or the upper bell 4 “Replay X-White BAR” depending on the stop operation position, even when the stop operation is performed in a lost push -"White BAR" is displayed stopped on the effective line.

  FIG. 62 (c-1) and FIG. 62 (c-2) are diagrams for explaining symbols stopped on the activated line when the player stops in the middle during the game in which the batting order bell L1 is won. In the game in which the batting bell L1 was won, when the first stop is in the middle, the middle symbol (Plum symbol) of the upper bell 1 or the middle symbol (white BAR symbol) of the upper bell 2 is middle bell in the effective line of the middle reel 12C. The stop display is given priority over the middle symbol (bell symbol). Specifically, in the game in which the batting order bell L1 is won, the middle reel 12C is stopped at the middle position, and the middle reel 12C is moved to the symbol position "0-11" or the symbol position "17-20" (hereinafter, symbol position "12 The plum symbol is stopped on the effective line of the middle reel 12C when the stop operation is performed except “16”. In this embodiment, the plum pattern of the middle reel 12C is stopped at the effective line at the first middle stop, and the display mode of each reel 12 in which the left reel 12L and the right reel 12R are fluctuating is shown as stop A (FIG. 62) It is called (c-1)). On the other hand, in the game in which the batting order bell L1 is won, the white BAR symbol is stopped in the effective line of the middle reel 12C when the first stop in the middle and the stop operation is performed at the symbol position "12-16". In the present embodiment, the display mode of each reel 12 in which the white BAR symbol of the middle reel 12C is stopped at the effective line and the left reel 12L and the right reel 12R are fluctuated at the middle first stop is shown in FIG. 62 (c-2)).

  FIG. 62 (c-1) is a diagram for explaining a winning combination in which the stop type A is stopped and displayed on the activated line. In the game in which the batting bell L1 is won, when the reel 12C is stopped in the stop type A, the upper bell 1 "Replay X-Plum-Plum" can be stopped and displayed by the stop operation position of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. It is. On the other hand, the middle bell "Bell-Bell-Bell" and the upper bell 4 "Replay X-White BAR-White BAR", which are won in duplicate with the upper bell 1, can not be stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the stop type A, the left reel 12L is stopped in the pull-in range of the replay X symbol (other than symbol positions "3 to 7"), and the right reel 12R is the pull-in range of plum symbol (symbol position The upper bell 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line by performing the stop operation in “15 to 19”.

  FIG. 62 (c-2) is a diagram for explaining a winning combination in which the stop type B is stopped and displayed on the activated line. In the game in which the batting bell L1 is won, when the reel 12C is stopped in the stop type B, the upper bell 4 can be stopped and displayed by the stop operation position of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. On the other hand, the middle bell and the upper bell 1, which have been won in duplicate with the upper bell 4, can not be stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the stop type B, the left reel 12L is operated to stop at the stop operation position where the replay X symbol can be pulled in, and the stop operation position where the white BAR symbol can be pulled in the right reel 12R (symbol position “ By performing the stop operation at 15 to 19 "), the upper bell 4 is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  FIG. 62 (c-3) and FIG. 62 (c-4) are diagrams for explaining the winning combinations to be stopped and displayed on the activated line in the case of the first right stop in the game in which the batting order bell L1 is won. . In the game where the batting bell L1 is won, when the first right stop is made, the right symbol (plum symbol) of the upper bell 1 or the right symbol (white BAR symbol) of the upper bell 4 is in the middle of the effective line of the right reel 12R. The stop display is given priority over the right symbol (bell symbol). Specifically, in the game in which the batting order bell L1 is won, when the right first stop is performed and the right reel 12R is operated to stop at a position other than the symbol position "15 to 19", the plums on the effective line of the right reel 12R. The symbol stops. In this embodiment, the plum design of the right reel 12R stops at the effective line at the first right stop, and the display mode of each reel 12 in which the left reel 12L and the middle reel 12C are fluctuating is stopped C (FIG. (C-3)). On the other hand, in the game in which the batting order bell L1 is won, the white BAR symbol is stopped on the effective line of the right reel 12R when the first right stop is performed and the stop operation is performed at the symbol position "15-19". In this embodiment, the white BAR symbol of the right reel 12R is stopped at the effective line at the first right stop, and the display mode of each reel 12 in which the left reel 12L and the middle reel 12C are fluctuating is stopped D (see FIG. 62 (c-4)).

  FIG. 62 (c-3) is a diagram for describing a winning combination in which the stop type C is stopped and displayed on the activated line. When the right reel 12R is stopped in the stop type C, the upper bell 1 "Replay X-Plum-Plum" can be stopped and displayed according to the stop operation position of the second stop operation and the third stop operation, and the middle bell "Bell- The bell-bell and the upper bell 4 "Replay X-White BAR-White BAR" can not be stopped. Specifically, in the case of the stop type C, the left reel 12L is stopped at the stop operation position where the replay X symbol can be pulled in, and the stop operation position where the plum symbol can be pulled in the middle reel 12C (symbol position "12 The upper bell 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line by performing the stop operation in a manner other than “16”.

  FIG. 62 (c-2) is a diagram for explaining a winning combination in which the stop type D is stopped and displayed on the activated line. When the right reel 12R is stopped in the stop type D, the upper bell 4 can be stopped and displayed, and the middle bell and the upper bell 1 can not be stopped displayed by the stop operation positions of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Specifically, in the case of the stop type D, the left reel 12L is stopped at the stop operation position where the replay X symbol can be pulled in, and the stop operation position where the white BAR symbol can be pulled in the middle reel 12C (symbol position “ By performing the stop operation at 12 to 16 "), the upper bell 4 is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  As described above, when the batting bell L1 is won, in addition to the middle bell, the two upper bells (1, 4) can be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the batting bell L1 is won, when the left first stop operation is performed, the stop forms A to D are displayed, and one of the two upper bells can be stopped and displayed. In the fourth embodiment, since the winning area number is notified, the player can identify two types of upper bells that have been won. Therefore, the player determines from the displayed stop type the upper bell that can be stopped and displayed in the present game (the upper bell 1 for the stop A or the stop C, the upper bell 4 for the stop B or the stop D). By stopping the remaining reels 12 at an appropriate stop operation position, the upper bell can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, when any of batting order bell L2 from batting order bell L2 is won, and when any of batting order bell C2 from batting order bell C1 is won, and when batting order bell R2 from batting order bell R1 When one of the two is selected, two upper bells are selected in duplicate in the middle bell. In the above case, even if the stop operation is performed in the middle bell by the pressing order of the missing bell, the upper bell which has been won in the current game can be identified from the instruction information as in the case where the batting bell L1 is won. Therefore, the upper bell can be stopped and displayed on the effective line by stopping each reel at the stop operation position where the upper bell won in the current game is stopped and displayed.

  As understood from the above description, the instruction information (the winning area number) of the present embodiment instructs the correct order of the middle bell and the stop operation position where the upper bell can be pulled in. Temporarily, in the game in which the batting order bell is won, it is assumed that the instruction information is not displayed when the first stop operation is performed in the push order. In the above configuration, the player can not confirm the type of the upper bell that has been won by the instruction information in the period after the first stop operation. In the present embodiment, as described above, the instruction information is continuously displayed even when the first stop operation is performed in the lost push order. Therefore, during the period after the first stop operation, it is possible to confirm the type of the upper bell that has been won by the instruction information. That is, in the period after the first stop operation, the stop operation position where the upper bell can be pulled can be confirmed by the instruction information. In the fourth embodiment, other than the winning area number may be adopted as the instruction information. For example, as in the first embodiment, information corresponding to a specific stop operation mode may be adopted as instruction information.

Fifth Embodiment
FIG. 63 (a) is a timing chart for describing a period in which the instruction information is displayed and a period in which the instruction effect is performed in the fifth embodiment. In the first embodiment described above, the start time PA of the display of the instruction information and the start time PB of the instruction effect are substantially simultaneous. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the display of the instruction information is started at a point different from the point when the instruction effect is started. Specifically, the main CPU 301 of the fifth embodiment starts the display of the instruction information at a time before the time when the instruction effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, when a game start operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command to the sub CPU 412. When the second command is received, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute an instruction effect immediately. In the above configuration, the start time PB3 of the instruction effect is immediately after the game start operation.

  On the other hand, the start time point PA3 of the display of the instruction information is a time point (or immediately before the passage of a specific period) after the start operation of the game is performed. In the above configuration, the start time PB3 of the instruction effect precedes the start time PA3 of the display of the instruction information. Also, as the above-mentioned specific period, for example, an acceleration period may be employed. In the above configuration, the start time PA3 of the display of the instruction information is substantially simultaneous with the start time of the stop operation acceptance period. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the execution period of spinning drum production as said specific period. In the above configuration, the display of the instruction information is started substantially simultaneously with the game start operation, and thereafter, the instruction effect is executed substantially simultaneously with the end time of the turning drum effect.

  By the way, when instructing the stop operation mode with both the instruction information and the instruction effect, it may be preferable to cause one to be focused more than the other. For example, when the performance of the instruction effect is superior to the instruction information, it is better to focus on the instruction effect than the instruction information. Further, in the case of instructing the stop operation mode with both the instruction information and the instruction effect, there is a circumstance that one which instructs the stop operation mode earlier may be more easily noticed than the other.

  The instruction effects of the fifth embodiment are executed by the liquid crystal display device 30 as in the first embodiment. The instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16 which is a 7-segment display. The image of the instruction effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 is more effective than the instruction information displayed on the 7-segment display. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the fifth embodiment, the instruction effect is displayed prior to the instruction information. According to the above configuration, an instruction effect with high effect is more easily noticed than the instruction information.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, as an example of a configuration in which the start time of display of the instruction information and the start time of the instruction effect are different, the configuration in which the instruction effect starts before the time when the display of the instruction information is started. showed that. However, the display of the instruction information may be started before the time when the instruction effect is started.

  FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram for describing a specific example in which the display of instruction information starts at a point in time before the point in time when the instruction effect is started. In the above specific example, as shown in FIG. 63B, when the game start operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command to the sub CPU 412. Further, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information immediately after transmitting the second command. In the above configuration, the start time PA4 of the display of the instruction information is immediately after the game start operation. The second command may be transmitted immediately after the instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  On the other hand, the start time PB4 of the instruction effect is a time (or immediately before the passage of a specific period) after the start operation of the game is performed. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 63 (b), the start time PA4 of the display of the instruction information precedes the start time PB4 of the instruction effect. For example, a weight period or an acceleration period may be employed as the specific period described above. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the execution period of spinning drum production as said specific period. In the specific example of FIG. 63 (b) described above, since the instruction information is displayed prior to the instruction effect, for example, the instruction information is more easily noticed than in the configuration where the instruction information is displayed after the instruction effect Become.

  According to the above fifth embodiment, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained. Further, according to the fifth embodiment, since the start time point PA of the display of the instruction information and the start time point PB of the instruction effect are different, it becomes easy to pay attention to one (instruction effect or instruction information) displayed in advance . The configuration may be such that the case where the instruction effect precedes the instruction information (FIG. 63 (a)) and the case where the instruction information precedes the instruction effect (FIG. 63 (b)) are appropriately selected. Further, the case where the instruction information precedes the instruction effect and the case where the instruction effect and the instruction information are displayed substantially simultaneously (FIG. 31 of the first embodiment) may be appropriately selected, or the instruction effect may be The case where the instruction information is preceded and the case where the instruction effect and the instruction information are displayed substantially simultaneously may be appropriately selected.

Sixth Embodiment
FIG. 64 (a) is a view for explaining the indication display 70 of the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 64 (a), the area outside the peripheral edge of the panel 10 in the front door 3 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the panel 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an indicator 70 is provided. Further, the panel 10 of the sixth embodiment is provided with a payout number indicator 80 in place of the indication indicator 16. Furthermore, the panel 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the stop operation order display lamps 29 (29L, 29C, 29R) are omitted.

  The instruction display 70 of the sixth embodiment is common to the instruction display 16 of the first embodiment in that the instruction information is displayed in the instruction display period TS (see FIG. 20). However, the instruction display 70 of the sixth embodiment is different from the instruction display 16 of the first embodiment in that the payout number of the current game is not displayed in the payout display period TH (see FIG. 20). The number of payouts for the current game is displayed by the payout number indicator 80. Further, the instruction display 70 displays the total number of medals paid out in the bonus operating state. As described above, the bonus operating state ends when the total number of medals paid out reaches 297. Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of medals that can be obtained in the bonus operation state by means of the instruction display 70.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the indication display 70 is configured to include a plurality of display areas 71 (L, C, R). Each display area 71 includes a left display area 71L, a middle display area 71C, and a right display area 71R. In addition, each display area 71 is configured of, for example, a 7-segment display. The left display area 71L displays the hundreds place of the total number of medals paid out in the bonus activated state. Further, the middle display area 71C displays the tenth place of the total number of medals paid out in the bonus activated state, and the right display area 71R displays one place of the total number of medals. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), when the bonus combination "red seven-red seven-red seven" is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the right display area 71R displays the number "0". Also, when the total number of medals paid out in the bonus activated state is 9 or less, the middle display area 71C is non-display (all segments are extinguished), and when the total number of medals is 99 or less, the left is displayed. The area 71L is hidden.

  As described above, the indication display 70 displays indication information in the AT state. The instruction information of the sixth embodiment is, for example, three numbers. Specifically, in the AT state, the left display area 71L instructs the timing (order) of the stop operation of the left stop button 25L of the stop buttons 25. For example, when the first stop operation of the left stop button 25L is instructed, the left display area 71L displays the number "1". The left display area 71L displays the number "2" when the second stop operation of the left stop button 25L is instructed, and the number "3" when the third stop operation of the left stop button 25L is instructed. Display Further, the middle display area 71C instructs the timing of the stop operation of the middle stop button 25C among the stop buttons 25. For example, when the first stop operation of the middle stop button 25C is instructed, the middle display area 71C displays the number "1". The middle display area 71C displays the number "2" when the second stop operation of the middle stop button 25C is instructed, and the number "3" when the third stop operation of the middle stop button 25C is instructed. Display Similarly, the right display area 71R instructs the timing of the stop operation of the right stop button 25R among the stop buttons. For example, when the first stop operation of the right stop button 25R is instructed, the number "1" is displayed, and when the second stop operation of the right stop button 25R is instructed, the number "2" is displayed, the right stop When the third stop operation of the button 25R is instructed, the number "3" is displayed.

  In the above configuration, for example, when instructing the stop operation order “left middle right”, the number “1” is displayed in the left display area 71L, the number “2” is displayed in the middle display area 71C, and the right display area 71R The number "3" is displayed on. That is, when instructing the stop operation order “left middle right”, the instruction display 70 describes the digit string “1, 2, 3” (hereinafter referred to as instruction information “1, 2, 3”) as instruction information. Is displayed. Similarly, when instructing the stop operation order "right and left", the instruction information "1, 3, 2" is displayed, and when instructing the stop operation order "middle left and right", the instruction information "2, 1, 3" When displayed and instructing the stop operation order "middle right left", the instruction information "3, 1, 2" is displayed, and when the stop operation order "right middle left" is instructed, the instruction information "2, 3, 1" When displayed and instructing the stop operation order "right middle left", the instruction information "3, 2, 1" is displayed. In addition, when the left first stop is instructed in the stop operation order, the numeral “1” is displayed in the left display area 71L, and the numerals are not displayed in the other display areas 71 (C, R). Specifically, among the three segments arranged in parallel in the vertical direction of the display area (seven segments), the middle segment is turned on and the other segments are turned off. That is, the symbol "-" (hyphen) is displayed in each display area 71 in which the number "1" is not displayed. In the above configuration, the instruction display 70 displays the instruction information “1,-,-” when the left first stop is instructed. Further, the instruction display 70 displays instruction information "-, 1,-" when middle first stop is instructed, and when the right first stop is instructed, instruction information "-,-, 1" Display

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the instruction display unit 70 displays the order for stopping the left stop button 25L, the order for stopping the middle stop button 25C, and the order for stopping the right stop button 25R. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively grasp the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information, as compared with the configuration (for example, the first embodiment described above) in which the order of stopping the stop buttons 25 is not displayed. However, in the sixth embodiment, the configuration may be such that the order of the stop operation of the stop buttons 25 is not displayed.

  FIG. 64 (b) is a time chart for illustrating the instruction display period TS of the sixth embodiment. Further, FIG. 64 (c) is a time chart for describing the instruction display period TS of the comparative example. Similar to the above-described first embodiment, the instruction display of the comparative example displays both the number of payouts for each game and the instruction information. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the instruction display of the comparative example displays instruction information in the instruction display period TS from the game start time PX to the game end time PY. Further, the payout number is displayed in the payout display period TH from the game end time PY to the time PZ when the betting medal of the next game is set. In the above comparative example, in the AT state, when the start operation of the current game is performed, the instruction display period TS is started, and when the current game is ended, the payout display period TH is started. Thereafter, when the start operation of the next game is performed, the instruction display period TS is started, and when the game is ended, the payout display period TH is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the indicator of the comparative example alternately displays the instruction information and the number of payouts. However, in the configuration in which the instruction information and the number of payouts are alternately displayed, there is a disadvantage that the player may easily confuse the instruction information with the number of payouts.

  In consideration of the above circumstances, the indication display 70 according to the sixth embodiment has a configuration in which indication information and other information are not displayed alternately. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the indication display 70 of the sixth embodiment displays indication information in the indication display period TS (similar to the comparison example). However, the instruction display 70 of the sixth embodiment does not display the number of payouts in the payout display period TH. In the sixth embodiment, the number of payouts for each game is displayed by the payout number indicator 80 in the payout display period TH. Further, the instruction display 70 does not display other information in the period from the current instruction display period TS to the next instruction display period TS (except when an error occurs, etc.). As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the instruction display 70 displays the total number of medals paid out in the bonus operating state in the bonus operating state.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, since the instruction information and the number of payouts are not displayed alternately, the inconvenience of mixing the instruction information and the number of payouts is suppressed. However, in the sixth embodiment, the instruction information and other information (including the number of payouts) may be alternately displayed. For example, the total number of medals acquired in the AT state may be displayed in a period between the current instruction display period TS and the next instruction display period TS. Moreover, in 6th Embodiment, although the stop operation order display lamp 29 was abbreviate | omitted from the panel 10, you may provide both the indicator 70 and the stop operation order display lamp 29. FIG. In the above configuration, the stop operation mode may be instructed by both the instruction display 70 and the stop operation order display lamp 29.

Seventh Embodiment
In the above each embodiment, the specific example in which the stop operation order is instructed by the instruction information has been shown. In the seventh embodiment described below, the stop operation position is instructed by the instruction information.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a conceptual view of a symbol arrangement table of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), on the left reel 12L of the seventh embodiment, a black BAR symbol is disposed at symbol position "16", and a black cherry symbol is disposed at symbol position "19". The white cherry pattern is arranged at 12 ", and the red cherry pattern is arranged at the pattern position" 05 ". Although not shown, in the seventh embodiment, each replay (X, Y) symbol of each reel 12 is arranged at an interval of 5 frames or less as in the first embodiment. Also, each bell symbol (including a star bell symbol) of each reel 12 is arranged at an interval of 5 frames or less.

  FIG. 65 (b) is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination provision table of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), RT3 transition replay is added to “Replay X-Replay X-Bell” and “Replay Y-Replay X-Bell” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Replay-Replay-Bell”), "Black BAR-Replay X-Bell", "Replay X-Black BAR-Bell", "Replay Y-Black BAR-Bell", "Replay X-Replay X-Black BAR", "Replay Y-Replay X-Black BAR" “Black BAR-Black BAR-Bell”, “Replay X-Black BAR-Black BAR”, “Replay Y-Black BAR-Black BAR”, and “Black BAR-Replay X-Black BAR” (follow, follow) Collectively referred to as “replay”, “black BAR-black BAR-black BAR” (hereinafter referred to as black BAR replay). The correct order for RT3 transition replay in the seventh embodiment is the same as in the first embodiment, the first game left in the game in which batting order replay Y1 was won, and the first halt in the middle in the game in which batting order replay Y2 was won, batting order replay In the game in which Y2 is won, it is the first right stop.

  In the game in which batting Replay Y (1 to 3) is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order of RT3 transition Replay, "Replay Y-Replay X-Bell" or Follow Replay or Black BAR Replay according to the stop operation position. Is stopped on the effective line. Specifically, in the game in which the batting replay Y is won, the black BAR replay is effective when the stopping operation is performed in the correct push order of the RT3 transition replay and the stopping operation is performed on all the reels 12 within the black BAR symbol drawing range. Stop display on the line. Hereinafter, the stop operation mode in which the black BAR replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line is referred to as the correct operation mode of the black BAR replay. In addition, in the game in which batting Replay Y was won, stop operation is performed in the correct order of RT3 transition Replay, and some reels 12 are stopped in the black BAR draw-in range, and the other part is black BAR symbol When the stop operation is performed outside the pull-in range of, any one of the follow replays is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Furthermore, in the game in which batting Replay Y is won, the stop operation is performed in the correct push order of RT3 transition Replay, and all the reels 12 are stopped outside the pull-in range of the black BAR symbol, “Replay-Replay-Bell”. Is stopped on the effective line. In the above configuration, in the game in which the batting replay Y is won, if the halting operation is performed in the correct push order of the RT3 transition replay, even if the halting operation is performed outside the pull-in range of the black BAR symbol (eyestroke mistake), Any RT3 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the seventh embodiment, the stop operation mode for stopping and displaying the black BAR replay is instructed in the start preparation state. As described above, when transitioning to the RT3 state in the start preparation state, the instruction state transitions to the in-AT state. In the above-described configuration, black BAR replay can be stopped and displayed in the game in which the state shifts to the AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the seventh embodiment, the cherry B "black cherry-ANY-ANY", the cherry W "white cherry-ANY-ANY" and the cherry R "red cherry-ANY-ANY" are winning combinations. Provided as In addition, "ANY" in FIG. 65 (b) means all the symbols. That is, when the black cherry symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 12L, the cherry B "black cherry-ANY-ANY" is displayed according to the symbols stopped and displayed on the effective line of the middle reel 12C and the right reel 12R. Not displayed on the effective line. Similarly, Cherry W "White Cherry-ANY-ANY" is a symbol that is displayed stopped on the effective line of the middle reel 12C and the right reel 12R when the white cherry symbol is displayed stopped on the effective line of the left reel 12L. Regardless, the stop line is displayed on the effective line, and the cherry R "red cherry-ANY-ANY" is the effective line of the middle reel 12C and the right reel 12R when the red cherry pattern is displayed on the effective line of the left reel 12L. The stop display is displayed on the effective line regardless of the symbol displayed stop on the.

  FIG. 65 (c) is a view for explaining an effective line of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (c), the effective line of the seventh embodiment includes an upper right line and a lower right line. In the seventh embodiment described above, the symbol at the symbol position "N" of the left reel 12L or the right reel 12R is the stop operation position (the symbol position of the middle line at the stop operation) is the symbol position "N-5" to "N + 1 In the case of “1”, the stop line is displayed on the effective line (UL1 or UL3 of the left reel 12L, UR1 or UR3 of the right reel 12R). For example, the black BAR symbol of the symbol position "16" of the left reel 12L and the right reel 12R is stopped and displayed on the effective line when the stop operation is performed at the symbol positions "11" to "17". The symbol at the symbol position "N" of the middle reel 12C is stopped and displayed on the effective line when the stop operation position is the symbol positions "N-4" to "N" as in the first embodiment. For example, the black BAR symbol of the symbol position "16" of the middle reel 12C is stopped and displayed on the effective line when the stop operation is performed at the symbol positions "12" to "16".

  In the above configuration, Cherry B, Cherry W and Cherry R have different stop operation modes for displaying a stop on the effective line. Specifically, since the black cherry B of the left reel 12L is located at the symbol position "19", when the stop operation position is at the symbol positions "14" to "20", it is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Further, since the white cherry W of the left reel 12L is located at the symbol position “12”, when the stop operation position is at the symbol positions “07” to “13”, the white cherry W is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Furthermore, since the red cherry R of the left reel 12L is located at the symbol position "05", when the stop operation position is at the symbol positions "00" to "06", the red cherry R is stopped and displayed on the effective line. As understood from the above description, the retraction range of one cherry (e.g. Cherry B) does not include the same graphic position as the retraction range of the other cherry (e.g. Cherry W and Cherry R). That is, there is no stop operation position capable of simultaneously pulling in two or more cherries. In the seventh embodiment, the stop operation position (pull-in range) where Cherry B can stop at the effective line is called the correct pressed position of Cherry B. Similarly, the stop operation position where Cherry W can stop at the effective line is called the correct touch position of Cherry W, and the stop operation position where Cherry R can stop at the active line is called the correct push position of Cherry R. The correct pressing position of each cherry (B, W, R) is notified in the AT state.

  In the seventh embodiment, in place of the batting bells (L, C, R) of the first embodiment, the cherries B, cherries W and cherries R are won. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the number of payouts of each cherry (B, W, R) is nine and equal to one another. Also, each of the cherries is elected alone. The probability of winning each cherry is equal to one another, and is set to the probability that the payout rate improves from the normal state in the AT state where the correct pressed position of each cherry is indicated. Also, when Cherry B, Cherry W or Cherry R is dropped, the RT1 transition symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  66 (a) and 66 (b) are conceptual diagrams of each instruction determination table (X, Y). As in the first embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines instruction information (instruction number) from the instruction determination table in each game, and causes the instruction indicator 16 to display the instruction information. Each instruction determination table includes an instruction determination table X and an instruction determination table Y. 66 (a) and 66 (b) show a simulated view of the indication display 16 in which indication information is displayed and the stop operation mode (stop operation order, stop operation position) indicated by the indication information. Indicated. Further, when determining the instruction information, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command indicating the instruction information to the sub CPU 412 as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 66 (a) is a conceptual diagram of the instruction determination table X. The main CPU 301 determines instruction information of each game in the normal state from the instruction determination table X. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the normal state, the instruction number "99" is determined (in the same manner as in the first embodiment) even when any of the winning areas is won. When the instruction number “99” is determined, the instruction display 16 does not display the instruction information.

  FIG. 66 (b) is a conceptual diagram of the instruction determination table Y. The main CPU 301 determines instruction information of each game in the AT state from the instruction determination table Y. Specifically, when the batting order replay Y1 is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the indication display 16 to display indication information “07”. The instruction information "07" corresponds to the correct operation mode of the black BAR replay in the game in which the batting replay Y1 is won. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), each reel 12 is drawn in the drawing range of the symbol position "16" (black BAR symbol) in the stop operation order of the left first stop according to the instruction information "07". It is instructed that the stop operation should be performed. When the batting order replay Y2 is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the indication display 16 to display indication information “08”. The instruction information “08” corresponds to the correct operation mode of the black BAR replay in the game in which the batting replay Y 2 is won. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the instruction information “08” indicates that each reel 12 should be stopped in the pull-in range of the symbol position “16” in the stop operation order of the middle first stop. Will be instructed. Furthermore, in the AT state, when the batting order replay Y3 is won, the main CPU 301 causes the indication display 16 to display indication information “09”. The instruction information “09” corresponds to the correct operation mode of the black BAR replay in the game in which the batting replay Y 3 is won. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the instruction information "09" indicates that each reel 12 should be stopped in the pull-in range of the symbol position "16" in the stop operation order of the first right stop. Will be instructed. As described above, according to the instruction information “7” to “9” of the seventh embodiment, both the stop operation order and the stop operation position are instructed.

  When the sub CPU 412 receives the second command indicating the instruction information “7”, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute an instruction effect instructing the stop operation mode corresponding to the instruction information “7”. For example, in the instruction effect when the second command indicating the instruction information “7” is received, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays an iconic image representing a black BAR symbol and a message “Aim from the left!”. Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the second command indicating the instruction information “8”, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute an instruction effect instructing the stop operation mode corresponding to the instruction information “8”. For example, in the instruction effect when the second command indicating the instruction information “8” is received, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays an iconic image representing a black BAR symbol and a message “Aim from inside!”. Similarly, when the sub CPU 412 receives the second command indicating the instruction information “9”, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute an instruction effect instructing the stop operation mode corresponding to the instruction information “9”. For example, in the commanded effect when the second command indicating the command information “9” is received, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays an iconic image representing a black BAR symbol and a message “Aim from the right!”.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the cherry B is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the indication display 16 to display indication information "10". The instruction information “10” corresponds to the correct pressing position of Cherry B. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the instruction information "10" instructs that the left reel 12L should be stopped in the pull-in range of the symbol position "19" (black cherry symbol). When the cherry W is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information “11”. The instruction information “11” corresponds to the correct pressing position of Cherry W. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the instruction information "11" instructs that the left reel 12L should be stopped in the drawing range of the symbol position "12" (white cherry symbol). Furthermore, when Cherry R is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information “12”. The instruction information “12” corresponds to the correct pressing position of Cherry R. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the instruction information "12" instructs that the left reel 12L should be stopped in the drawing range of the symbol position "05" (red cherry symbol).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the correct pressing position of each cherry (B, W, R) is not instructed in the normal state, but is instructed in the AT state. Therefore, in the AT state, the payout rate improves more than in the normal state. Further, in the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a command that enables an effect that can greatly affect the ball out rate is not transmitted from the main CPU 301 in a normal state. Specifically, in the seventh embodiment, a command that can identify the correct touch position of the cherry that has won in the current game is not transmitted from the main CPU 301 in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, the sub CPU 412 can not determine an effect for designating the pressed position of the correct cherry according to the command from the main CPU 301.

  FIG. 66C is a diagram for describing commands (first command, second command) transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412. As shown in FIG. 66C, in the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first command when the batting order replay (X1 to X6, Y1 to Y3) is won in the normal state is a command “ The second command is common to the command "B99". Further, the second command in the case where the batting order replay is won in the AT state differs depending on the kind of the batting order replay. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 can not execute the instruction effect for instructing the correct push order of the RT transition replay in the normal state, and executes the instruction effect for instructing the correct push order of the RT transition replay in the AT state. It is possible (similar to the first embodiment).

  As shown in FIG. 66 (c), in the normal state, the first command when Cherry B is won is the command "A02". Similarly, in the normal state, the first command when Cherry W wins is the command “A02”, and the first command when Cherry R wins is the command “A02”. In the normal state, the second command when Cherry B is elected, the second command when Cherry B is elected, and the second command when Cherry B is elected are common to the command "B 99". is there. In the above configuration, in the normal state, it is not possible to identify the correct pressed position of cherry from the first command and the second command. On the other hand, in the AT state, the second command when Cherry B is won is the command "B10". In the AT state, the second command when Cherry W wins is the command "B11", and the second command when Cherry R wins is the command "B12". In the above configuration, in the AT state, it is possible to identify the correct pressing position of Cherry from the second command.

  According to the seventh embodiment, the same effect as that of the above-described first embodiment can be obtained. In the seventh embodiment, the correct pressing position of one winning combination is indicated by one instruction information, but the correct pressing positions of a plurality of winning combinations may be indicated by one instruction information. For example, instruction information may be displayed that instructs the left reel 12L to be stopped at the correct pressing position of Cherry B or the correct pressing position of Cherry W. In the above configuration, for example, the instruction information is displayed with a probability of about 1/2 when Cherry B is won, and the instruction information is displayed with a probability of about 1/2 when Cherry W is won. According to the above configuration, the game property of making the player select the white cherry or the black cherry of the left reel 12L is realized.

Eighth Embodiment
The main CPU 301 of the eighth embodiment transmits a winning area command (Com 11-19, Com 41-4C) or a group command (Com 1 F, Com 4 F) in place of the first command and the second command of the first embodiment. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining each command of the eighth embodiment. The sub CPU 412 determines various effects including the navi effect and the instruction effect according to the winning area command or the group command.

  As shown in FIG. 67, each command is configured to include first data and second data. The data length of each of the first data and the second data in the present embodiment is 4 bits. That is, the data length of each command is 8 bits. However, the data length of each command can be changed as appropriate. In FIG. 67, the winning area command is described as “ComXY”. “X” of the winning area command “ComXY” is a numerical value representing the first data of the winning area command in hexadecimal. Also, "Y" is a numerical value representing the second data of the selected area command in hexadecimal.

  Each winning area command is generated from the winning area of the current game. For example, when the batting order replay X1 is won, a winning area command Com11 in which the first data is the numerical value "0001" and the second data is the numerical value "0001" is generated. Also, when the batting replay X2 is won, a winning area command Com12 is generated in which the first data is the numeric value "0001" and the second data is the numeric value "0010", and when the batting replay X3 is won, the first data is the numeric value " When the winning area command Com13 having the second data "0011" is generated at 0001 "and the batting order replay X4 is won, the winning area command Com14 having the first data" 0001 "and the second data" 0100 "is generated. Is generated, and when the batting order replay X5 is won, a winning area command Com15 having the first data as the numerical value "0001" and the second data as the numerical value "0101" is generated, and when the batting order replay X6 is the first one, the first data is so. A winning area command Com16 having the value "0001" and the second data of the value "0110" is generated.Furthermore, when the batting order replay Y1 is won, a winning area command Com17 in which the first data is the numerical value "0001" and the second data is the numerical value "0111" is generated, and when the batting order replay Y2 is won, the first data is the numerical value " When the winning area command Com18 in which the second data is the numerical value "1000" is generated in 0001 "and the batting order replay Y3 is won, the winning area command Com19 in which the first data is the numerical value" 0001 "and the second data is the numerical value" 1001 ". Is generated.

  As described above, in each winning area command when the batting order replay (X, Y) is won, the first data is common and the numeric value is "0001". In addition, in each winning area command when the batting order replay is won, the second data is different from each other. In the above configuration, when the winning area command Com11 to 19 is received, the sub CPU 412 can identify the winning of the batting order replay from the first data of the winning area command, and identifies the type of the batting order replay from the second data. It is possible. When the sub CPU 412 receives the winning area commands Com11 to Com19, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect which instructs the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay or the RT3 transition replay according to the type of batting order replay identified from the selected area command.

  When the batting order bell L1 is won, a winning area command Com41 in which the first data is the numerical value "0100" and the second data is the numerical value "0001" is generated. When the batting bell L2 is won, a winning area command Com42 is generated in which the first data is the number "0100" and the second data is the number "0010", and when the batting bell L3 is the winning, the first data is the number " When the winning area command Com43 of which the second data is the numerical value "0011" is generated at 0100 "and the batting order bell L4 is won, the winning area command Com44 of which the first data is the numerical value" 0100 "and the second data is the numerical value" 0100 ". Is generated. Furthermore, when the batting bell C1 is won, a winning area command Com 45 in which the first data is the number "0100" and the second data is the number "0101" is generated, and when the batting bell C2 is won, the first data is the number " When the winning area command Com46 in which the second data is the numerical value "0110" is generated at 0100 "and the batting order bell C3 is won, the winning area command Com47 in which the first data is the numerical value" 0100 "and the second data is the numerical value" 0111 ". Is generated, and when the batting order bell C 4 is won, a winning area command Com 48 in which the first data is the numerical value “0100” and the second data is the numerical value “1000” is generated. Similarly, when the batting bell R1 is won, a winning area command Com 49 in which the first data is the number "0100" and the second data is the number "1001" is generated, and when the batting bell R2 is won, the first data is the number. When the winning area command Com4A having the second data "1010" at the "0100" is generated and the batting bell R3 is won, the winning area command having the first data "0100" and the second data "1011" is generated. When Com4B is generated and the batting order bell R4 is won, a winning area command Com4C in which the first data is the numerical value "0100" and the second data is the numerical value "1100" is generated.

  As described above, in each winning area command when the batting bell (L, C, R) is won, the first data is common and the numeric value is “0100”. Further, in the winning area commands when the batting bell is won, the second data is different from each other. In the above configuration, when the winning area command Com41 to 4C is received, the sub CPU 412 can identify the winning of the batting bell from the first data of the winning area command, and identifies the type of the batting bell from the second data. It is possible. When the sub CPU 412 receives the winning area commands Com 41 to 4 C, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect for instructing the correct pressing order of the middle bell according to the batting order bell identified from the winning area command.

  When the batting order replay or batting order bell is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 generates the above-mentioned winning area commands (Com 11 to 19 and Com 41 to 4 C), and transmits them to the sub CPU 412. On the other hand, in the normal state, when the batting order replay or batting order bell is won, the main CPU 301 generates a winning area command (Com11-19, Com41-4C), and generates a group command (Com1F, Com4F) from the winning area command. Do. In the normal state, when the batting order replay or the batting order bell is won, the main CPU 301 transmits a group command to the sub CPU 412 instead of the winning area command. That is, in the normal state, each winning area command (Com11 to 19 and Com4 to 4C) is not transmitted.

  Specifically, when batting order replay (X1 to X6, Y1 to Y3) is won in the normal state, a group command Com1F is generated from the winning area commands Com11 to Com19 as shown in FIG. The sub CPU 412 can identify from the group command Com1F that the batting order replay has been won, but can not identify the type of the batting order replay (which one of the nine types). Therefore, the correct pressing order of the RT transition replay is not identified from the group command Com1F. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 can not determine the instruction effect for instructing the correct pressing order of the RT transition replay by the group command Com1F.

  When a batting bell (L1 to L4, C1 to C4, R1 to R4) is won in a normal state, a group command Com4F is generated from the winning area commands Com41 to 4C as shown in FIG. The sub CPU 412 can identify from the group command Com 4 F that one of the batting bells has been won, but can not identify the type of batting bell (whichever is the 12 types). Therefore, the correct pressing order of the middle bell is not identified from the group command Com4F. In the above-described configuration, the sub CPU 412 can not determine an instruction effect for instructing the correct pressing order of the middle bell by the group command Com4F.

  In this embodiment, a group command is generated by masking a winning area command. Specifically, a numerical value “1” is ORed with each bit of the second data of the winning area command. In the above configuration, regardless of the second data of the winning area command (before the calculation), the second data of the group command (after the calculation) becomes the numerical value “1111”. Therefore, when the batting order replay is won, the group command Com1F is generated in common regardless of the batting order replay type. When the batting bell is won, the group command Com 4 F is generated in common regardless of the type of batting bell. The type of winning area (winning area number) can not be identified from the above group command.

  According to the eighth embodiment, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained. Note that the method of generating the group command is not limited to the above configuration, and any appropriate method may be adopted if the types of batting replay and batting bell can not be identified. For example, each bit of the second data of the winning area command may be ANDed with a numerical value "0". In the above configuration, the second data of the group command becomes the numerical value "0000" regardless of the winning area command. The type of winning area is not identified from the above group commands.

The Ninth Embodiment
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the display of the liquid crystal display device and the instruction display 16 in the bonus notification state in the ninth embodiment. In the bonus notification state, in the area RX of the liquid crystal display device 30, a message indicating that the bonus combination is won is displayed. For example, in the region RX, a message of "BOUNUS finalization" and an image representing the symbol combination "red seven-red seven-red seven" of the bonus combination are displayed. The region RX is located, for example, near the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30.

  FIG. 68 (a) shows the display of the liquid crystal display device 30 and the instruction display 16 when the non-group winning area (BAR replay, normal replay, cherry, watermelon, common bell, chance eye) is won in the bonus notification state. It is a figure for demonstrating. When the non-group winning area is won in the bonus notification state, the type of the non-group winning area is notified in the area RY of the liquid crystal display device 30. The region RY is located, for example, on the lower right side of the region RX. The position of the region RY can be changed as appropriate. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the non-group winning area is won in the bonus notification state, the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction display 16.

  The screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 of FIG. 68A is a specific example in the case where cherry (strong cherry, weak cherry) in the non-group winning area is won. In the above case, an iconic image representing a cherry pattern is displayed in the area RY. When a watermelon is won, an iconic image representing a watermelon symbol is displayed in the area RY, and when a common bell is elected, an iconic image representing a bell symbol is displayed. In addition, when the weak chance eye or the strong chance eye is won, for example, a message of “chance” is displayed in the area RY. The method of informing the type of non-group winning area is not limited to the above example.

  In the above configuration, when the winning combination of the bonus combination is notified in the area RX and the winning area is not notified in the area RY (when the winning area "losing" is determined), the stop operation in which the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line Aspects are most advantageous. On the other hand, when the winning of the bonus combination is notified in the area RX and the winning of the watermelon combination is notified in the area RY, the stop operation mode in which the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line is most advantageous. As understood from the above description, in the bonus notification state, in the game in which the instruction information is not displayed, it is possible to execute an effect of instructing a stop operation mode for improving the payout rate. In the above configuration, a notification of the type of non-group winning area is illegally generated, and there remains a room for cheating to increase the payout rate. However, the effect of notifying the type of the non-group winning area has less influence on the payout rate, for example, as compared with the instruction effect of notifying the correct pressing order of the batting order bell. Therefore, the influence of the notification of the type of the non-group winning area in the bonus notification state on the payout rate is limited, and the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior is suppressed.

  FIG. 68 (b) is a view for explaining the display of the liquid crystal display device 30 and the instruction display 16 when the batting bell (L, C, R) is won in the bonus notification state. When the batting order bell is won in the bonus notification state, the instruction symbol image SY1 is displayed below the region RX of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above configuration, as in the AT state and the start preparation state, the correct push order of the middle bell is notified by the instruction icon image Y1. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), when the batting order bell is won in the bonus notification state, the instruction display unit 16 displays the instruction information corresponding to the correct pressing order of the middle bell.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the bonus operating state starts, the bonus notifying state ends. However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in the stop operation mode in which the bonus combination is not displayed on the active line and the fraudulent act of intentionally extending the bonus notification state in which the correct order of middle bell is instructed Ru. Therefore, the bonus notification state of the ninth embodiment is configured to end under a predetermined end condition in addition to the start of the bonus operation state. Specifically, when the winning area "loss" is won, the bonus notification state is ended. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned cheating is suppressed.

<Modification>
Each of the above forms can be variously modified. The aspect of a concrete modification is illustrated below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the following examples may be appropriately combined.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the AT state is configured by the in-AT state, the start preparation state, the end preparation state, and the bonus notification state, but the instruction state of the AT state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the bonus notification state may be omitted from the AT state. In addition, the start timing and end timing of each instruction state can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the first embodiment, when the AT counter is decremented to the numerical value "0", the in-AT state is ended, but the AT counter is decremented to the numerical value "0" and the predetermined end lottery ends. If it is determined, the in-AT state may end.

(2) The low probability normal state and the high probability normal state in which the AT state is more likely to win than the low probability normal state may constitute the normal state. Further, in the above configuration, when winning the weak rare role or strong rare role in the low probability normal state, transition to the high probability normal state with a predetermined probability, and winning the batting bell in the high probability normal state, It may be configured to shift to the low probability normal state with a predetermined probability.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, when the winning area "duplicate bonus" is won, the bonus combination and the watermelon combination are simultaneously selected. However, the bonus combination may be configured to be won in duplicate with other winning combinations. However, the winning combination winning in combination with the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the specific operation mode from the viewpoint of suppressing an act of raising the payout rate improperly by notifying the winning of the duplicate bonus illegally. A winning combination (for example, square cherry, middle row cherry) or a winning combination (for example, one sheet A, one sheet B) having a smaller number of payouts than the prescribed number (3 sheets) required to start the game is preferable.

(4) In each above-mentioned form, the trigger (RT transfer pattern) which RT state transfers can be changed suitably. For example, when the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, it may be configured to shift to a specific RT state. That is, the symbol combination of "star bell-watermelon-black BAR" in the watermelon role may be used as the RT transition symbol. In the RT state when the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line, for example, the winning probability of replay is higher than that in the RT1 state, and ends in a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games).

  However, it is preferable that in the normal state, the sub CPU 412 can not notify the stop operation mode in which a specific RT transition symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, when the symbol combination relating to a specific winning combination is the RT transition symbol, it is preferable that the sub CPU 412 can not determine the notification of winning of the specific winning combination. For example, in the first embodiment described above, the first command capable of identifying the winning of the one-piece winning combination B is transmitted to the sub CPU 412. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 can notify of the winning of the one-piece winning combination B, and by the notification of the winning of the one-piece winning combination B, the player can stop and display the one-piece winning combination B on the activated line. However, if one winning combination B is an RT transition symbol, the notification of winning the combination of one winning combination B can greatly affect the payout rate. In the above case, the first command is analyzed by an unfair method, and the unfair act of causing the one-in-one B to be notified of winning becomes a problem. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the above-described first embodiment, in the normal state, it is possible for the sub CPU 412 to execute the notification of winning one winning combination B, while the single winning combination B is not an RT transition symbol.

(5) The instruction information is not limited to the above embodiments. For example, in the first embodiment, the numerals “1” to “12” are displayed as instruction information, but an alphabet may be displayed as the instruction information. In addition, the operation error information is not limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, in the first embodiment, the symbol "-" (two hyphens) is displayed as the operation error information, but a number or an alphabet may be used as the operation error information.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the instruction display unit is configured to display information other than the instruction information (the number of payouts, the total number of medals in the bonus operation state, and the type of error). May be displayed. Further, the type of information to be displayed on the indication display is not limited to the above embodiments. For example, the indication indicator may display the number of remaining games in the AT state.

  By the way, in a configuration in which information other than the instruction information (hereinafter referred to as “specific information”) is displayed on the instruction display, the display condition of the specific information may be satisfied in the display period of the instruction information. For example, when an error is detected in the display period of the instruction information, a condition for displaying the type of error (specific information) is satisfied in the display period of the instruction information. In the above configuration, it is preferable that a configuration in which whether to display instruction information in preference to specific information or to display specific information in preference to instruction information is predetermined according to the type of the specific information is preferable. For example, when an error is detected in the display period of the instruction information, it is preferable that the type of error be displayed prior to the instruction information. According to the above configuration, even if it is the display period of the instruction information, the type of error is notified by the instruction display.

(7) In the above embodiments, the instruction information is not displayed in the normal state. However, even in the normal state, when it is not possible to stop operation in the stop operation mode corresponding to the instruction information in the current game, the instruction information may be displayed thereafter. For example, in the period after the third stop operation, the display of the instruction information corresponding to the pressing order of the middle bell may be started. In the above configuration, since the instruction information is not displayed at a time when the stop operation can be performed in the middle pusher's correct order (before the first stop operation), the player grasps the instruction information and then performs the first stop operation. I can not Therefore, in the above configuration, as in the above-described embodiments, the payout rate can not be improved by the instruction information in the normal state.

  In addition, even in the normal state, if it is impossible to stop operation in the winning game in the correct pressing order (the correct pressing position) in the current game, then a command capable of identifying the correct pressing order is It may be configured to be transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412. For example, in a period after the third stop operation, a command capable of identifying the correct pushing order of the middle bell in the current game may be transmitted. According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine an effect after the third stop operation according to, for example, the correct press order of the middle bell of the current game. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the effects after the third stop operation.

(8) In the above-mentioned each form, although the instruction | indication indicator was provided in the panel 10, the place in which an instruction | indication indicator is provided can be changed suitably. For example, an indicator may be provided in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 30. In addition, the waist panel 6 or the tray unit 7 may be provided with an indicator. However, the player usually plays while watching each reel 12 or the liquid crystal display device 30. Therefore, for example, in the case where the lumbar panel 6 or the tray unit 7 is provided with the indication display, the problem is that the indication information is difficult to see as compared to the case where the indication display is provided on the panel 10 (near each reel 12). Can occur. Therefore, in the configuration in which the lumbar panel 6 or the tray unit 7 is provided with the indication display, it is preferable that the liquid crystal display device 30 or the like notify the stop operation mode indicated by the indication information.

(9) The indication indicator is not limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, the indication display 16 of the first embodiment is composed of two 7-segment displays, and the indication indicator 70 of the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 64) is composed of three 7-segment displays. However, the indication display may be configured with one 7-segment display, or may be configured with 4 or more 7-segment displays. Furthermore, the indication indicator may be configured other than the 7-segment display. For example, an image display device may be employed as the indication display. As the image display device, a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display or a dot matrix type display configured of a plurality of LEDs may be employed.

  FIG. 69 (a) is a simulated view of the indicator 90 in the modification. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the indicator display 90 of the modification is configured of one 7-segment display. Further, as shown in FIG. 69A, the indication display 90 is configured to include a segment LA, a segment LB, a segment LC, a segment LD, a segment LE, a segment LF, and a segment LG. In FIG. 69A, the segments L (B, E) to be lit are displayed by hatching. In the specific example of FIG. 69A, instruction information (described later) for displaying the left first stop in the instruction information is shown.

  FIG. 69 (b) is a conceptual view of the instruction determination table of the modification. In each game, the main CPU 301 of the modification determines an instruction number from the instruction determination table, and displays instruction information corresponding to the instruction number on the instruction indicator 90. In the instruction information of the modified example, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), various stop operation orders are instructed (similar to the first embodiment). Further, FIG. 69 (b) shows a segment L which is turned on and a segment L which is turned off in order to indicate each stop operation order. Specifically, a segment to be extinguished when designating the stop operation order is indicated by a numerical value “1”, and a segment extinguished when indicating the stop operation order is indicated by “0”. For example, when instructing the left first stop, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the segments LA, LC, LD, LF and LG are extinguished, and the segments LB and LE are lit.

  The modification shown in FIG. 69 described above has an advantage that the number of seven-segment displays can be reduced, for example, as compared with the case where the indication indicator is configured by two or more seven-segment displays. However, when the indication indicator is configured by one 7-segment display, the number of types of indication information that can be displayed is reduced. For example, a configuration is assumed in which the numbers “0” to “9” are displayed on each 7-segment display. In the above-described configuration, the instruction display device configured by two 7-segment displays can display 100 types of instruction information from the numeral "00" to the numeral "99". On the other hand, in the indication display constituted by one seven segment, ten kinds of indication information from the numeral "0" to the numeral "9" can be displayed. That is, in the above-described configuration, in the case of the instruction display device configured with one 7-segment display, the case where it is necessary to display ten or more types of instruction information becomes a problem. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the modification shown in FIG. 69, information other than numerals (for example, information shown in FIG. 69A) can be displayed as instruction information. According to the above modification, more than ten (12 types in the example of FIG. 69) instruction information can be displayed by one 7-segment display.

  By the way, when information other than a number is adopted as the instruction information, there may occur a problem that it is more difficult to distinguish the stop operation order corresponding to each instruction information than when a number is adopted as the instruction information. Therefore, in the configuration that employs information other than numbers as the instruction information, the configuration in which the stop operation order corresponding to the instruction information is notified by the instruction effect (for example, each instruction effect in the first embodiment) of the liquid crystal display device 30 etc. It is suitable. According to the above configuration, while the number of types of instruction information that can be displayed on the instruction display is increased, the liquid crystal display device 30 can clearly notify the stop operation order corresponding to the instruction information. In the modification described above, some or all of the plurality of pieces of instruction information may be numbers.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the method of displaying the instruction information in the instruction display period TS can be changed as appropriate. FIG. 70A is a diagram for describing a method of displaying instruction information in the instruction display period TS in the modification. FIG. 70 (a) shows a specific example of instructing the stop operation order "left middle right". Further, in the modification of FIG. 70 (a), it is assumed that a single digit 7-segment display is adopted as a pointing indicator.

  In the modified example of FIG. 70 (a), one stop button 25 to be operated for stop is instructed at each time of the instruction display period TS. Specifically, immediately after the game start operation is performed, instruction information corresponding to the stop button 25 to be subjected to the first stop operation is displayed on the instruction display. Also, immediately after the first stop operation, the instruction information corresponding to the stop operation button 25 to be subjected to the second stop operation is displayed on the indication display, and when the second stop operation is performed, immediately after that. The instruction information corresponding to the stop operation button 25 to be subjected to the third stop operation is displayed on the instruction display. When the third stop operation is performed, the indication indicator is hidden. For example, as shown to Fig.70 (a), the case where stop operation order "left middle right" is designated is assumed. In the above configuration, the instruction information "7" corresponds to the left stop button 25L, the instruction information "8" corresponds to the middle stop button 25C, and the instruction information "9" corresponds to the right stop button 25R. When each instruction information is displayed, a stop operation of the stop button 25 corresponding to the instruction information is instructed. For example, in the example of FIG. 70 (a), immediately after the game start operation is performed, the instruction information "7" is displayed on the instruction display, and immediately after the first stop operation is performed, the instruction information is displayed on the instruction display. "8" is displayed, and immediately after the second stop operation is performed, the instruction information "9" is displayed on the instruction display. In the above example, the stop operation order becomes “left middle right” by performing stop operation of the stop button 25 instructed at each time.

(11) FIG. 70 (b) is a diagram for describing a method of displaying instruction information in the instruction display period TS in another modification. FIG. 70 (b) shows a specific example of displaying the winning area number "12" (batting order bell L) as instruction information. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 70 (b), the order of the left first stop is indicated. Further, in the modification of FIG. 70 (b), it is assumed that a one-digit seven-segment display is adopted as a pointing indicator.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 70 (b), the display of the indication display is automatically switched at predetermined time intervals in the indication display period TS. Specifically, the instruction display switches between and displays the tens digit of the winning area number and the one digit of the winning area number. For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the instruction display displays the number "1" immediately after the game start operation is performed. After that, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the indication display displays the number "2" in place of the number "1". In addition, the indication display becomes non-displaying when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number "2" is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed in the non-display state, the indication display switches the number "1" and the number "2" again and displays them. That is, the indication indicator has a predetermined time length cycle (hereinafter referred to as “display cycle TY”), the tens digit (numeral “1”) of the winning area number and the digit (numeral “2”) ") Is displayed repeatedly.

  A period TX shown in FIG. 70 (b) is a period from when the game start operation is performed to when the stop operation reception period is started. The period TX includes, for example, a weight period and an acceleration period. As described above, from the viewpoint of suppressing the operation error, it is preferable that the instruction information (the winning area number) is displayed before the start time point of the stop operation reception period. Temporarily, when the time length of display cycle TY is longer than the time length of period TX, only the tens digit (the numeral “1”) of the instruction information is displayed before the start of the stop operation reception period, and one digit of the instruction information The number "2" may not be displayed before the start of the stop operation reception period. In the above case, the instruction information is not identifiably displayed to the player. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the modification of FIG. 70 (b), the time length of the display cycle TY is shorter than the minimum value of the time length of the period TX.

  According to the above configuration, the instruction information is identifiably displayed before the stop operation reception period. In the above modification, the display cycle TY may be made sufficiently small (for example, the display cycle TY = 2 ms) to make it difficult for the player to identify the instruction information. In the above configuration, since the stop operation mode is difficult to identify from the instruction information, for example, the player can be made to pay attention to the instruction effect of the liquid crystal display device 30.

(12) The point in time when the display of the instruction information is started is sufficient if it is before the point in time when the stop operation becomes possible, and the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments. Further, the point in time when the instruction effect is started is sufficient if it is before the point in time when the stop operation becomes possible, and the invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments. Further, the point in time when the display of the instruction information ends is not limited to the above embodiments. For example, the instruction information may be continuously displayed after the symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed.

(13) In the first embodiment described above, the instruction display unit 16 is configured to display instruction information instructing that the stop button 25 should be operated in either the first operation mode or the second operation mode. Instruction information “10” indicating that the stop operation should be performed in the order of the first stop or middle first stop, or instruction information that indicates that the stop operation should be performed in the left first stop or the right first stop order “ An example is shown in which the instruction display unit 16 displays instruction information “12” indicating that the stop operation should be performed in the order of 11 ′ ′ or middle first stop or right first stop. However, the above configuration is not limited to the example of the first embodiment.

  71 (a-1) and 71 (a-2) are diagrams for describing a modified example of displaying instruction information for instructing the first operation mode and the second operation mode. FIG. 71 (a-1) is a conceptual diagram of the instruction determination table A of the modification. The main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using the instruction determination table A in each game in the normal state. Specifically, when the batting replay X1 or the batting replay X2 is won, the instruction number "31" is determined with a probability of about 1/100, and the instruction number "99" is determined with a probability of about 99/100. When the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “31”, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “31”. As described above, the correct push order for the RT2 transition replay in the game in which the batting replay X1 was won is "left middle right", and the correct pushing order for the RT2 transition replay in the game in which the batting replay X2 is won is "right and left in the middle" It is. In the above configuration, when the instruction information “31” is displayed, the player performs the stop operation in the order of “left middle right” or “left and right middle”. That is, in the above configuration, it can be said that the instruction information “31” instructs that the stop operation should be performed in the order of “left middle right” or “right and left middle”. Similarly, when the batting Replay X3 (RT2 Transition Replay's correct push order "Middle left and right") or Batting Replay X4 (RT2 Transition Replay's correct push order "Middle right left") is elected, the instruction number "Probably with 1/100 32 "and determine the instruction number" 99 "with a probability of about 99/100. When the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “32”, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “32”. In the above configuration, the instruction information “32” indicates that the stop operation should be performed in the order of “middle left and right” or “middle right left”. In addition, if batting replay X5 (RT2 transition replay's correct push order "right left middle") or batting replay X6 (RT2 transition replay's correct push order "right middle left") is won, the instruction number "probability 1/100" 33 "and determine the instruction number" 99 "with a probability of about 99/100. When the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “33”, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “33”. In the above configuration, the instruction information “33” indicates that the stop operation should be performed in the order of “right and left middle” or “right, middle and left”. The probability that instruction numbers “31” to “33” are determined can be changed as appropriate.

  In the above modification, in the game in which the instruction information “31” to “33” is displayed, the privilege is awarded when the stop operation can be performed in the correct push order of the RT2 transition replay (in the case of correct answer to the second choice). Specifically, in the game in which the instruction information is displayed, in the case where the stop operation can be performed in the correct order of the RT2 transition replay, the transition to the AT state is determined.

  FIG. 71 (a-2) is a figure for demonstrating an example of a display of the liquid crystal display device 30 when instruction number "31" is determined. When any of the instruction numbers "31" to "33" is determined, the RT2 transition replay "Replay-Bell-Bell" is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and a message indicating transition to the AT state is the liquid crystal display device Displayed on 30 Further, when any one of the instruction numbers “31” to “33” is determined, each instruction icon image S (X 1, A) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Specifically, two instruction icon images SA and one instruction icon image SX1 are arranged in the left-right direction, and the stop operation order is instructed by the order of the instruction icon image SA and the instruction icon image SX1. . Specifically, when the instruction number "31" is determined, as shown in FIG. 71 (a-2), the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed on the left end side of the liquid crystal display device 30, and each instruction signal image SX1 is displayed on the right side An instruction icon image SA is arranged. In the above case, the character string "1,?,?" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30, and it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed in the order of "left middle right" or "left right middle". Although illustration is omitted, when the instruction number “32” is determined, the character string “?, 1,?” Is displayed, and “middle left / right” or “middle right left” is instructed to perform the stop operation. Similarly, when the instruction number "33" is determined, the character string "?,?, 1" is displayed, and "right middle left" or "right middle left" is instructed to perform the stop operation.

  FIG. 71 (b-1) is a conceptual diagram of the instruction determination table C of the modification. The main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using the instruction determination table C in each game in the end preparation state. In the modification of FIG. 71 (b-1), as in the first embodiment, when the batting bell (L, C, R) is won, an instruction number “10” instructs the left first stop or the middle first stop. The instruction number “11” instructing left first stop or right first stop and the instruction number “12” instructing middle first stop or right first stop are determined with a predetermined probability, and In the game in which the instruction number is determined, the pressing order effect E (see FIG. 28) is executed. However, the modification of FIG. 71 (b-1) is different from the first embodiment in that the instruction number "99" (no instruction) can be determined when the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (b-1), when the batting order bell L is won, the instruction number "10" is determined with a probability of about 1/3, and the instruction number "11" with a probability of about 1/3. Is determined, and the instruction number "99" is determined with a probability of about 1/3. When the batting order bell C is won, the instruction number "10" is determined with a probability of 1/3, the instruction number "12" is determined with a probability of 1/3, and the instruction number "99" with a probability of 1/3. "Is determined. When the batting bell R is won, the instruction number "11" is determined with a probability of 1/3, the instruction number "12" is determined with a probability of 1/3, and the instruction number "99" with a probability of 1/3. It is determined.

  In the above configuration, when any of the instruction numbers “10” to “11” is determined in the game in which the batting bell is won, the AT state is continued by correctly answering the stop operation order of two choices. On the other hand, in the game in which the batting bell is won, when the instruction number "99" is determined, the AT state continues by correct to 3 choices. Therefore, since the probability that the AT state continues (probability 1/2 or probability 1/3) changes in the game in which the batting bell is won, the game property is improved compared to the configuration in which the probability that the AT state continues does not change. It can be done.

  FIG. 71 (b-2) is a diagram for describing an example of display on the liquid crystal display device 30 when the batting order bell is won and the instruction number “99” is determined in the end preparation state. As described in FIG. 28 described above, in each push-by-touch effect E, the stop button 25 to be subjected to the first stop operation could be identified by the arrangement of the two designated icon images SA and one designated icon image SB. Specifically, the stop button 25 which should not be subjected to the first stop operation could be identified by the arrangement of the instruction icon image SB (symbol “x”). On the other hand, in the case where the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state, and the instruction number "99" is determined, three instruction icon images SA are arranged as shown in FIG. 71 (b-2). The stop button 25 which should not be stopped can not be identified. In the above configuration, a specific stop operation order is not instructed.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a stop operation (stop operation error) is performed outside the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information, the liquid crystal display device 30 may be configured to display a specific image. For example, when the player makes an operation mistake, a message “miss” may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Hereinafter, an image for notifying the player of an operation error is referred to as an “operation error image”.

  In the first embodiment, when the player makes an operation mistake, operation mistake information is displayed on the instruction display 16 (see FIG. 20). In the above configuration, when the player makes a mistake in operation, the liquid crystal display device 30 may display an image at the time of operation mistake or may continuously display an image of an instruction effect. Further, in the third embodiment, when the player makes an operation mistake, the indication indicator 16 is not displayed (see FIG. 61). In the above configuration, when the player makes a mistake in operation, the liquid crystal display device 30 may display an image at the time of operation mistake or may continuously display an image of an instruction effect. In the fourth embodiment, even when the player makes an operation mistake, the indication display 16 continues the display of indication information (see FIG. 62). In the above configuration, when the player makes a mistake in operation, the liquid crystal display device 30 may display an image at the time of operation mistake or may continuously display an image of an instruction effect.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, when the watermelon combination, the cherry combination (corn cherry, middle cherry), and the one-piece (A, B) (non-group winning area) are won, the instruction information is not displayed. However, when the non-group winning area is won, the instruction information may be displayed. For example, when a non-group winning area is won, the winning area number of the winning area may be displayed as instruction information. Further, the instruction information in the case where the non-group winning area is won may be displayed in the AT state or may be displayed in the normal state.

  In order to realize the above configuration, for example, there is provided a stop operation mistake command transmitted when there is a stop operation mistake, and the main CPU 301 is configured to transmit the stop operation mistake command when there is a stop operation mistake. Conceivable. In the above configuration, when the stop operation mistake command is received by the sub control board 400, for example, an image notifying of the stop operation mistake is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Further, in the configuration in which the image for notifying the stop operation error is displayed, the above-described stop operation error command may not be provided. For example, an image notifying of a stop operation error may be displayed according to the second operation and the stop operation command indicating the type of the stop button subjected to the stop operation. For example, it is assumed that the stop operation order indicated by the second command is the left first stop. In the above case, when the stop operation command of the left stop button 25L is not received first, an image notifying a stop operation error is displayed. The above configuration has the advantage that the operation error command is reduced.

(16) In each of the above forms, the number of games from the winning of the bonus combination to the transition to the AT state (bonus notification state) is set to three, but the number of games until the transition to the AT state is appropriately It can be changed. In addition, the number of games from the winning of the bonus combination to the transition to the bonus notification state may be determined by lottery. In the above configuration, the number of games until transition to the bonus notification state becomes variable. Further, in the above configuration, the number of games for the continuous effect may be variable in accordance with the number of games until transition to the bonus notification state.

(17) In the fourth embodiment, the winning area number (the type of batting order bell) is illustrated as information for enabling the upper bell to be displayed on the effective line when the stop operation is performed in the middle pusher's push order. However, the information for enabling the display of the upper bell to be stopped is not limited to the winning area number. For example, the symbol position of each symbol on the upper bell may be displayed. In the above configuration, for example, when the upper bell 4 "Replay x-White BAR-White BAR" can be stopped and displayed in this game, the symbol position "2, 12, 16, 19" of the replay x symbol on the left reel 12L. The symbol position "16" of the white BAR symbol of the middle reel 12C and the symbol position "19" of the right reel 12R are displayed on the indication display 16. As a specific aspect of the above configuration, when the batting bell is won, the correct pressing order of the middle bell is notified, and thereafter, when the stopping operation is performed in the lost pushing order, the symbol position of each symbol of the upper bell is displayed Configurations are assumed. In the above configuration, for example, when the batting order bell L is won, the instruction information for instructing the left first stop is displayed first. Thereafter, when the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 25L, the symbol position of each symbol of the upper bell is displayed on the indication display in place of the instruction information instructing the left first stop. According to the above configuration, as in the fourth embodiment, the upper bell can be stopped and displayed on the effective line even when the stop operation is performed in the middle push bell order.

(18) The present invention can be applied not only to the above-described pachislot machine but also to pachinko machines, other game machines, and gaming machines in general.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention variably displays start operation means (start lever 24) operated when starting a game, and a plurality of kinds of symbols when the game is started, and the symbols as a result of the game Variable display means (each reel 12) capable of stopping and displaying combinations, stop operation means (each stop button 25) operated when displaying symbols stopped, and specific display means (instruction indicator) for displaying various information And a game medium can be started when the game medium is inserted, and the winning combination is determined in each game, and the symbol combination is variably displayed according to the stop operation mode of the player for the stop operation means and the winning combination. When the symbol combination stopped and displayed is determined and it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium of the number of payouts corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is paid out It is a main control means, and when the predetermined winning combination is determined, the specific display means can be controlled to the first display mode that can specify the stop operation mode for stopping and displaying the predetermined symbol combination, and is predetermined When the symbol combination of is stopped and displayed, the specific display means is controlled to the second display mode that can specify the number of payouts corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the stop operation mode specified from the first display mode The main control means (main CPU 301) for transmitting the operation mode command to indicate, and the instruction effect for notifying the operation mode indicated by the operation mode command when the operation mode command is received, the first instruction effect and the first instruction effect and Has a sub-control unit selectable from a plurality of instruction effects including a different second instruction effect and a (sub-CPU 412), and the main control unit determines a predetermined winning combination In the selected game, the specific display means is controlled to the first display mode in a period from when the stop operation of the symbol becomes possible to when the final stop operation means is operated, and the predetermined symbol combination is the stop display Control the specific display means to a third display mode different from the first display mode and different from the second display mode for a predetermined length of time, and thereafter performing a specific operation It is possible to control the specific display means in the second display mode without need, and include a specific period of a predetermined length of time in the period before the stop operation of the symbol becomes possible after the game start operation is made In some cases, the predetermined time length is a time length that allows the player to recognize that the specific display means is controlled in the third display mode, and when the specific display means includes a specific period, The specific period is over In the pre-stop period after the start, the display in the first display mode is started immediately before the stop operation of the symbol becomes possible, and the time length of the specific period is variable.

  According to the above configuration, instruction information for instructing the operation mode of the stop operation means is displayed by the specific display means controlled by the main control means. Therefore, even if a fault occurs in the sub control means, the stop operation mode is indicated by the specific display means controlled by the main control means.

  Further, in the configuration of the present invention, when the operation mode command is received, the instruction effect of notifying the operation mode indicated by the operation mode command is a second instruction effect in which the first instruction effect and the first instruction effect are different. And sub-control means selectable from a plurality of instruction effects including In the above configuration, since one stop operation mode is notified by a plurality of instruction effects, the instruction effect is richer in comparison with the configuration in which the instruction effect of one stop operation mode does not change.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... game machine, 300 ... main control board, 301 ... main CPU, 302 ... main ROM, 303 ... main RAM, 304 ... random number generator, 305 ... I / F circuit, 400 ... sub control board, 410 ... effect control board 411 ... I / F circuit 412 ... sub CPU, 413 ... sub ROM, 414 ... sub RAM, 420 ... image control board, 421 ... image control CPU, 422 ... image control ROM, 423 ... VDP, 424 ... CG ROM, 425 ... RAM, 430 ... sound board, 431 ... sound source IC, 432 ... sound source ROM.

Claims (1)

Start operation means operated when starting the game;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols when a game is started, and capable of stopping and displaying symbol combinations as a result of the game,
Stop operation means operated when the symbol is stopped and displayed;
Specific display means for displaying various information;
The game can be started when a game medium is inserted, and a winning combination is determined in each game, and the symbol combination is changed according to the stop operation mode of the player for the stop operation means and the winning combination. It is a main control means for paying out the game media of the number of payouts corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination when it is determined that the symbol combination stopped and displayed is determined and the predetermined symbol combination is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the predetermined winning combination is determined, the specific display means can be controlled to the first display mode capable of specifying the stop operation mode for stopping and displaying the predetermined symbol combination, and the predetermined When the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the specific display means is controlled to a second display mode that can specify the number of payouts corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and A main control means for transmitting the operation mode command indicating stopping operation mode specified from the display mode,
When the operation mode command is received, an instruction effect for notifying an operation mode indicated by the operation mode command is a plurality of instruction effects including a first instruction effect and a second instruction effect different from the first instruction effect. Equipped with selectable sub control means,
In the game in which the predetermined winning combination has been determined, the main control means at least performs the first display during a period from when the stop operation of the symbol is enabled to when the last stop operation means is operated. In the third display mode different from the first display mode and different from the second display mode after the specific display means is controlled in the mode and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. After controlling the specific display means for a predetermined length of time and then controlling the specific display means to the second display mode without requiring a specific operation, and after the game start operation is performed There may be a case where a specific period of a predetermined length of time is included in the pre-stop period until the symbol stop operation becomes possible,
The predetermined time length is a time length that allows the player to recognize that the specific display means is controlled in the third display mode,
When the specific period is included, the specific display means starts the display in the first display mode immediately before the stop operation of the symbol becomes possible in the pre-stop period after the specific period ends. And
A game machine characterized in that a time length of the specific period is variable.

Images